’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
1
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster overview 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1− 1
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
2
1. Side defroster outlets
2. Instrument cluster
3. Center vents
4. Electric moon roof switch and personal
lights
5. Garage door opener
6. Auxiliary boxes
7. Side vents
8. Power door lock switches
9. Power window switches
10. Glove box
11. Automatic transmission selector lever
12. Rear ashtray
13. Input terminal adapter
14. Power outlets
15. Cup holder
16. Container
17. Front ashtray
18. Audio remote control switches
19. Hood lock release lever
20. Parking brake pedal
21. Window lock switch
Instrument panel overview
"Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system (view A)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
3
1. Side defroster outlets
2. Instrument cluster
3. Center vents
4. Electric moon roof switch and personal
lights
5. Garage door opener
6. Auxiliary boxes
7. Side vents
8. Power door lock switches
9. Power window switches
10. Glove box
11. Automatic transmission selector lever
12. Rear ashtray
13. Cup holder
14. Container
15. Power outlet
16. Front ashtray
17. Audio remote control switches
18. Hood lock release lever
19. Parking brake pedal
20. Window lock switch
"Vehicles without rear seat entertainment system (view A)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
4
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Emergency flasher switch
4. Clock
5. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
6. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger and windshield wiper
de−icer switch
7. Air conditioning controls
8. Audio system
9. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights
10. Snow mode button
11. Seat heater switches
12. Cigarette lighter
13. “TRAC OFF” switch
(two−wheel drive models)
14. Cruise control switch
15. Ignition switch
16. Tilt steering lock release lever
17. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
"Vehicles with manual air conditioning controls (view B)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
5
18. Power outlet (115 VAC) main switch
19. Rear heater main switch
20. Theft deterrent system/engine
immobilizer system indicator light
21. Power rear view mirror control switches
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
6
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Emergency flasher switch
4. Clock
5. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
6. Air conditioning controls and
multi−information display
7. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger and windshield wiper
de−icer switch
8. Audio system
9. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights
10. Snow mode button
11. Seat heater switches
12. Cigarette lighter
13. “TRAC OFF” switch
(two−wheel drive models)
14. Cruise control switch
15. Ignition switch
16. Tilt steering lock release lever
17. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
"Vehicles with automatic air conditioning controls (view B without navigation system)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
7
18. Power outlet (115 VAC) main switch
19. Rear heater main switch
20. Theft deterrent system/engine
immobilizer system indicator light
21. Power rear view mirror control switches
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
8
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Emergency flasher switch
4. Clock (See the separate “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”.)
5. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
6. Navigation system including air
conditioning controls (See the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
7. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
8. Audio system (See the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
9. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights
10. Snow mode button
11. Seat heater switches
12. Cigarette lighter
13. “TRAC OFF” switch
(two−wheel drive models)
14. Cruise control switch
15. Ignition switch
16. Tilt steering lock release lever
"Vehicles with automatic air conditioning controls (view B with navigation system)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
9
17. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
18. Power outlet (115 VAC) main switch
19. Rear heater main switch
20. Theft deterrent system/engine
immobilizer system indicator light
21. Power rear view mirror control switches
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
10
1. Tachometer
2. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights
3. Speedometer
4. Fuel gauge
5. Low fuel level warning light
6. Engine coolant temperature gauge
7. Trip meter reset knob
8. Odometer and two trip meters
9. Instrument panel light control knob
Instrument cluster overview
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
11
Brake system warning light
∗
1
Charging system warning light
∗
1
Low engine oil pressure warning light
∗
1
Malfunction indicator lamp
∗
1
SRS warning light
∗
1
Driver’s seat belt reminder light
∗
1
Open door warning light
∗
1
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light
∗
1
(four−wheel drive models)
or
Low windshield washer fluid level warning
light
∗
1
or
Vehicle stability control system warning light
∗
1
Anti−lock brake system warning light
∗
1
or
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
∗
1
Low tire pressure warning light
∗
1
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
12
∗
1
: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 133 in Section 1−6.
∗
2
: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 163 in
Section 1−7.
Cruise control indicator light
∗
2
Overdrive−off indicator light
Slip indicator light
Turn signal indicator lights
Automatic transmission indicator lights
Snow mode indicator light
Traction control system off indicator light
Headlight high beam indicator light
or
Engine oil replacement reminder light
∗
1
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
“AIRBAG ON” indicator light
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
13
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobilizer system 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back door 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric moon roof 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1− 2
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
14
Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.
1. Master keys—
These keys work in every lock.
Since the side doors can be locked
without a key, you should always carry
a spare key in case you accidentally
lock your keys inside the vehicle.
2. Sub key—
This key will not work in the glove box.
To protect items locked in the glove
box when using valet parking, leave
the sub key with the attendant.
KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key num-
ber and storing it in a safe place.
Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.
1. Master keys (black)—
These keys work in every lock. Your
Toyota dealer will need one of them to
make a new key with a built−in trans-
ponder chip.
Since the side doors can be locked
without a key, you should always carry
a spare key in case you accidentally
lock your keys inside the vehicle.
2. Sub key (gray)—
This key will not work in the glove box.
To protect items locked in the glove
box when using valet parking, leave
the sub key with the attendant.
Keys (without engine
immobilizer system)
Keys (with engine immobilizer
system)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
15
A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.
NOTICE
When using a key containing a trans-
ponder chip, observe the following
precautions:
z When starting the engine, do not
use the key with a key ring resting
on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts.
z When starting the engine, do not
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of oth-
er vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after remov-
ing other transponder keys (includ-
ing keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
16
z Do not bend the key grip.
z Do not cover the key grip with any
material that cuts off electromagnet-
ic waves.
z Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
z Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under direct sunlight.
z Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
z Do not use the key with electromag-
netic materials.
KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key num-
ber and storing it in a safe place.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
17
The engine immobilizer system is a
theft prevention system. When you in-
sert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head
transmits an electronic code to the ve-
hicle. The engine will start only when
the electronic code in the chip corre-
sponds to the registered ID code for
the vehicle.
The system is automatically set when the
key is removed from the ignition switch.
The indicator light will start flashing to
show the system is set.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer.
D The indicator light stays on.
D The indicator light does not start flash-
ing when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
D The indicator light flashes inconsistent-
ly.
Inserting the registered key in the ignition
switch automatically cancels the system,
which enables the engine to start. The
indicator light will go off.
For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key. However, there is a limit
to the number of additional keys your
Toyota dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the sys-
tem or start the engine.
NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disas-
semble the engine immobilizer sys-
tem. If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, proper opera-
tion of the system cannot be guaran-
teed.
Engine immobilizer system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
18
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI−20BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS−210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
1. “LOCK” switch
2. “UNLOCK” switch
3. “PANIC” switch
Wireless remote control—
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
19
The wireless remote control system is
designed to lock or unlock all the side
doors and back door, or activate the
“PANIC” mode from a distance within
approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.
When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely.
The wireless remote control transmitter is
an electronic component. Observe the fol-
lowing instructions in order not to cause
damage to the transmitter.
D Do not leave the transmitter in places
where the temperature becomes high
such as on the dashboard.
D Do not disassemble it.
D Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.
D Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-
trol transmitters for the same vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed
information.
If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the side doors and back
door or alarm, or operate from a normal
distance:
D Check for closeness to a radio trans-
mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.
D The battery may have been consumed.
Check the battery in the transmitter. To
replace the battery, see “—Replacing
transmitter battery” on page 22.
If you lose your transmitter, contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
avoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-
dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-
mote control transmitter” on page 355 in
Section 4.)
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is en-
couraged to try to correct the interfer-
ence by one or more of the following
measures:
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
20
D Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
tenna.
D Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
D Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
D Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Locking operation
Unlocking operation
To lock and unlock all the side doors
and back door, push the switches of
the transmitter slowly and securely.
To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the
side doors and back door are locked si-
multaneously. At this time, one beep will
be heard, and the turn signal lights flash
once.
Check to see that all the side doors and
back door are securely locked.
If any of the side doors or back door is
not securely closed, locking cannot be
performed by the “LOCK” switch and a
beep will sound continuously for 10 sec-
onds. However, if the key is in the igni-
tion, a beep will not sound.
To stop the beep, close all the side doors
and back door securely or push the
“UNLOCK” switch.
The beep may be on or off. Ask your
Toyota dealer for details. If you wish to
change the settings yourself, see
“—Switching beep sound” described below.
To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch
once to unlock the driver’s door alone.
Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds
unlocks all the side doors and back door
simultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”
switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,
and the turn signal lights flash twice.
—Locking and unlocking
doors
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
21
This double switch operation to unlock all
the side doors and back door can be
changed to a single switch operation. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
When all the side doors and back door
are unlocked simultaneously with a wire-
less remote control transmitter, the center
interior light, personal lights and ignition
switch light come on for about 15 seconds
before fading out, even if the door is not
opened. (For details, see “Interior lights”
on page 122, “Personal lights” on page
123 and “Ignition switch light” on page
124 in Section 1−5.)
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
side doors and back door will be automati-
cally locked again. At this time, one beep
will be heard, and the turn signal lights
flash once.
The timing for the automatic door lock
function can be changed. For details, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-
tion is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push again.
The wireless door locking or unlocking
function can be erased. For details, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
You can switch the beep on and off. (The
beep is on initially and after battery re-
placement.)
To switch the beep on and off:
With the driver’s door opened—
1. Insert the ignition key and remove it.
2. Within 5 seconds, insert the ignition
key again and turn it to the “ON” posi-
tion.
3. After 10 seconds, push the same
“LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or “PANIC” switch
twice within 10 seconds.
Two beep sounds inform you that the
program has been switched on or off.
If this procedure is not followed exactly,
the beep will not operate as expected.
Check the beep on/off operation by push-
ing the transmitter switch after you finish
this procedure. If the beep does not oper-
ate as expected, repeat this procedure
from step 1.
—Switching beep sound
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
22
Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the
horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights and tail lights.
The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-
hicle theft when you witness anyone at-
tempting to break into or damage your
vehicle.
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
alarm midway, do the following:
D Push the “PANIC” switch once again.
D Unlock any of side door or back door
with the key or wireless remote control
transmitter.
D Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”
to “ON” position.
The “PANIC” mode does not work when
the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
The alarm function can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium
battery or equivalent.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to pre-
vent small children from swallowing
the removed transmitter battery or
components.
NOTICE
z When replacing the transmitter bat-
tery, be careful not to lose the com-
ponents.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the transmitter battery by follow-
ing these procedures:
—Activating panic mode
—Replacing transmitter
battery
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
23
1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
transmitter case.
2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-
tery by ballpoint pen. Insert the tip of
ballpoint pen at the guide groove and
lift as shown in the above illustration.
3. Put in a new transmitter battery with
positive (+) side up.
Close the transmitter case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the trans-
mitter still does not operate properly, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
24
NOTICE
z Do not bend the terminals.
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the transmitter bat-
tery are faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.
z Do not touch or move any compo-
nents inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the transmitter bat-
tery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the transmitter case.
z Close the transmitter case securely.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.
To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.
All the side doors and back door lock and
unlock simultaneously with either front
door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the
key once will unlock the driver’s door and
twice in succession will unlock all the side
doors and back door simultaneously.
This double key turning operation to un-
lock all the side doors and back door can
be changed to a single key turning opera-
tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-
er.
When all the side doors and back door
are unlocked simultaneously using a key,
the center interior light, personal lights
and ignition switch light will come on and
remain on for about 15 seconds before
fading out. (For further information, see
“Interior lights” on page 122, “Personal
lights” on page 123 and “Ignition switch
light” on page 124 in Section 1−5.)
The driver’s window can be opened or
closed with the key operation in the driv-
er’s door keyhole. (For details, see “Power
windows” on page 27 in this Section.)
Side doors
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
25
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH
INSIDE LOCK KNOB
Move the lock knob.
To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
Closing the side door with the lock knob
in the lock position will also lock the side
door. Be careful not to lock your keys in
the vehicle.
The door cannot be locked when either
front door is open and the key is in the
ignition.
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Push the switch.
To lock: Push the switch down on the
front side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
rear side.
Operating the switch simultaneously locks
or unlocks all the side doors and back
door.
If you do either of the following, no side
door or back door can be unlocked with
the power door lock switch.
D Lock all the side doors and back door
with the key or wireless remote control
transmitter when all the side doors and
back door are closed.
D Open the driver’s door or front passen-
ger’s door and move the inside lock
knobs of both front doors to the lock
position, then close the front doors.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
26
The power door lock switch can be reset
in the following ways.
D Turn the ignition key to “ON”.
D Unlock all the side doors and back
door with the key or wireless remote
control transmitter.
D Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-
senger’s door with the inside lock
knob, and then unlock all the doors
and back door with the power door
lock switch.
REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child−protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the ve-
hicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the ve-
hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-
vent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
27
Window lock
switch
Driver’s door
Passengers’ doors
The windows can be operated with the
switch on each side door. The passen-
ger window can also be controlled by
the switches on the driver’s door.
The power windows work when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows
cannot be operated.
Automatic operation (driver’s window
only): Push the switch completely down
or pull it completely up, and then release
it. The window will fully open or close. To
stop the window partway, lightly move the
switch in the opposite direction and then
release it.
Jam protection function: During automat-
ic closing operation, the window stops and
opens half way if something gets caught
between the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
Key off operation: If all the side doors
and back door are closed, they work for
43 seconds even after the ignition switch
is turned off. They stop working when the
either front door is opened.
Power windows
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
28
OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE
The driver’s window can be operated
with the key inserted in the driver’s
door keyhole.
To open: Turn the key fully backward and
hold it.
To close: Turn the key fully forward and
hold it.
After the door is locked or unlocked, the
window begins to move.
Operations stop when the key is released.
This feature can be disabled. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.
D Before you close the power win-
dows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious in-
jury. When anyone closes the power
windows, make sure he or she op-
erates the windows safely.
D When small children are in the ve-
hicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervi-
sion. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unex-
pected use of the switches.
D Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.
D Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the power window switches and
get trapped in a window. Unat-
tended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.
D Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could re-
sult in a serious injury.
D The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
29
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.
To lock: Turn the key clockwise.
To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.
To open the back door, pull the lock
release lever.
Operating the power door lock switch or
wireless remote control transmitter simul-
taneously locks or unlocks the back door.
(See “—Locking and unlocking doors” on
page 20 and “Side doors” on page 24 in
this Section.)
When closing the back door, make sure
it is fully closed.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 313
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
When closing the back door, the inside
strap can be used to make the reach
easier.
To close the back door, lower it and press
down on it. After closing the back door,
try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-
ly closed.
Back door
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
30
CAUTION
Keep the back door closed while driv-
ing. This not only keeps the luggage
from being thrown out but also pre-
vents exhaust gases from entering
the vehicle.
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is closed and securely locked. Other-
wise, the hood may open unexpected-
ly while driving and an accident may
occur.
2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.
Hood
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
31
3. Hold the hood open by inserting the
support rod into the slot.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. and return the support rod to its
clip—this prevents rattles. Then lower the
hood and make sure it locks into place.
If necessary, press down gently on the
front edge to lock it.
CAUTION
After inserting the support rod into
the slot, make sure the rod supports
the hood securely from falling down
on to your head or body.
To deter vehicle theft, the system is
designed to sound an alarm if any of
the side doors, back door or hood is
forcibly unlocked or the battery termi-
nal is disconnected and then recon-
nected when the system is set.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently
and flashes the headlights, tail lights and
turn signal lights, and turns on the interior
light.
SETTING THE SYSTEM
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position and remove it.
The indicator light will start flashing when
the key is removed from the ignition
switch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”
on page 17 in this Section for details.)
2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.
3. Close and lock all the side doors, back
door and hood.
The indicator light will remain on when all
the side doors, back door and hood are
closed and locked.
Theft deterrent system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
32
The system will automatically be set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the
indicator light will start flashing again.
4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the ve-
hicle.
Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.
Canceling the system
The system will cancel within 30 seconds
before the system is set automatically un-
der any of the following conditions:
D Any of the side doors, back door or
hood is opened.
D Any of the side doors or back door is
unlocked.
D The key is inserted into the ignition.
D The battery terminal is reconnected.
If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,
the theft deterrent system has been
alarmed. Check to see if there is any
abnormality with your vehicle.
WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET
Activating the system
The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions:
D If any of the side doors and back door
is unlocked or opened without the key
or wireless remote control transmitter,
or if the hood is forcibly opened.
D If the battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected.
D If the ignition is hot−wired.
The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.
If any of the side doors and back door is
unlocked without the key or wireless re-
mote control transmitter and the key is
not in the ignition switch, all the side
doors and back door will be automatically
locked again.
After about 1 minute, the alarm will auto-
matically stop and the indicator light will
start flashing again.
Reactivating the alarm
Once set, the system automatically resets
the alarm after the alarm stops.
The alarm will activate again under the
same circumstances described in
“Activating the system”.
Stopping the alarm
The alarm will be stopped by the following
conditions:
D Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”
to “ON” position.
D Unlock any of the side doors or back
door with the key or wireless remote
control transmitter.
If the battery becomes discharged due
to the vehicle being unused for a long
time, etc., when the battery is recharged
or replaced, the system will give the
alarm. If this happens, immediately unlock
any of the side doors or back door with
the key or the wireless remote control
transmitter, and the alarm will stop.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
33
TESTING THE SYSTEM
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The side doors and back door should
be locked with the key or wireless re-
mote control transmitter. Be sure to
wait until the indicator light starts flash-
ing.
3. Unlock any door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.
4. Stop the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
doors and hood. When testing the
hood, also check that the system is
activated when the battery terminal is
disconnected and then reconnected.
If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
is on the left side of your vehicle.
1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
lever up.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
CAUTION
D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-
low open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.
D When opening the cap, do not re-
move the cap quickly. In hot weath-
er, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly re-
moved.
Fuel tank cap
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
34
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap counterclockwise by 90 de-
grees (to the pressure point 1), and
then turn it an additional 30 degrees
(to point 2). Pause slightly before
removing it.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened.
3. The removed cap can be stored on
the back side of the fuel filler door.
Position the cap so that the hooks point
to the left and right, and set it in the
receptacle on the back side of the door.
When installing the cap, turn the cap
clockwise until you hear a click. When
you hear the click, the cap is fully
closed.
If the cap is not installed securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
D Make sure the cap is installed se-
curely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.
D Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank
cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the cap, apply
force only in the turning direction to
the cap. Do not pull or pry it.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
35
Sliding operation
Tilting operation
To operate the moon roof, use the
switch between the personal lights.
The moon roof works when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The sun shade can be opened or closed
by hand.
Sliding operation—
To open: Push the switch toward the
“SLIDE OPEN” side.
The roof will open and stop partway 45
mm (1.8 in.) from the fully opened posi-
tion. When you push the switch toward
the “SLIDE OPEN” side again, the moon
roof will open fully. To stop the roof part-
way, push the switch toward either the
“SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP” side quickly
while the roof is moving.
As driving with the moon roof opened fully
will cause wind throbs, we recommend
you to drive with the moon roof partway
45 mm (1.8 in.) from the fully opened
position.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will open while the
switch is depressed and stop when re-
leased.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.
To close: Push the switch toward the
“TILT UP” side.
The roof will fully close automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch
toward either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT
UP” side quickly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will close while the
switch is depressed and stop when re-
leased.
Tilting operation—
To tilt up: Push the switch toward the
“TILT UP” side.
The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch
toward either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT
UP” side quickly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the
switch is depressed and stop when re-
leased.
To tilt down: Push the switch toward the
“SLIDE OPEN” side.
The roof will fully tilt down automatically.
To stop the roof partway, push the switch
toward either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT
UP” side quickly.
Electric moon roof
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
36
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will tilt down while
the switch is depressed and stop when
released.
Key off operation: If all the side doors
and back door are closed, it works for 43
seconds even after the ignition switch is
turned off. It stops working when either
front door is opened.
Jam protection function:
D If something gets caught between the
moon roof and frame during slide clos-
ing operation, the moon roof stops and
then opens slightly.
D If something gets caught between the
moon roof and frame during tilting
down operation, the moon roof stops
and then tilts up fully.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.
D While the vehicle is moving, always
keep the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Other-
wise, they could be seriously in-
jured if the vehicle stops suddenly
or if the vehicle is involved in an
accident.
D Before you close the moon roof,
always make sure there is nobody
around the moon roof. You must
also make sure nobody places his
or her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof,
first make sure it is safe to do so.
D Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.
D Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the moon roof switch and get
trapped in the roof opening. Unat-
tended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.
D Never sit on top of the vehicle
around the roof opening.
D Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could re-
sult in a serious injury.
D The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the moon roof is fully
closed.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
37
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flattening seatbacks 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heaters 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrests 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbags 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1− 3
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
38
While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-
hicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and prop-
erly wear the seat belts provided.
CAUTION
D Do not drive the vehicle unless the
occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow any passengers to sit on
top of a folded−down seatback, or
in the luggage compartment or car-
go area. Persons not properly
seated and/or not properly re-
strained by seat belts can be se-
verely injured in the event of emer-
gency braking or a collision.
D During driving, do not allow any
passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Otherwise,
severe injuries can occur in the
event of emergency braking or a
collision.
Driver seat
CAUTION
The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if
the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag
is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety.
This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your
breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in sever-
al ways:
D Move your seat to the rear as far
as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
D Slightly recline the back of the
seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250
mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, sim-
ply by reclining the back of the
seat somewhat. If reclining the back
of your seat makes it hard to see
the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.
D If your steering wheel is adjustable,
tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as rec-
ommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.
Seats
Front seats—
—Front seat precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
39
Front passenger seat
CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury es-
pecially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passen-
ger seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
Front seats (with SRS side airbags)
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags are installed in
the driver and front passenger seats.
Observe the following precautions.
D Do not lean against the front door
when the vehicle is in use, since
the side airbag inflates with consid-
erable speed and force. Otherwise,
you may be killed or seriously in-
jured.
D Do not use seat accessories which
cover the area where the side air-
bags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from acti-
vating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.
D Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such change may prevent
the side airbag system from activat-
ing correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate ac-
cidentally, resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.
D After adjusting the seat position, re-
lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.
D After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.
D Do not put objects under the seats.
Otherwise, the objects may interfere
with the seat−lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat posi-
tion adjusting lever and the seat
may suddenly move, causing the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
—Seat adjustment precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
40
D While adjusting the seat, do not put
your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and
injured.
1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING
KNOB
To change the angle of the seat cush-
ion on the front side, turn the knob
either way.
3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER
To change the height of the seat, pull
up or push down the lever.
4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
LEVER
Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.
—Adjusting front seats
(manual seat)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
41
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts pro-
vide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply re-
straint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoul-
der belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is re-
clined, the greater the risk of death
or personal injury.
1. SEAT POSITION, SEAT CUSHION
ANGLE AND SEAT HEIGHT
ADJUSTING SWITCH
Move the adjusting switch in the de-
sired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
SWITCH
Move the adjusting switch in the de-
sired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat-
back at that position.
—Adjusting front seats (power
seat)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
42
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts pro-
vide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply re-
straint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoul-
der belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is re-
clined, the greater the risk of death
or personal injury.
3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT
ADJUSTING SWITCH
Press either side of the switch.
The amount of lumbar support will change
while the switch is pressed.
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving.
D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.
D Be careful not to get your hands or
feet pinched in the seat.
D After adjusting the seat position, re-
lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.
D After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.
D When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the follow-
ing precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or
sudden stop:
Make sure the seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.
Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
Folding down the rear seatbacks will en-
large the luggage compartment. See
“—Stowage precautions” on page 313 in
Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
Rear seats—
—Rear seat precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
43
Vehicles with third seat Vehicles without third seat
1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
LEVER
Pull the lever up. Then lean back to the
desired angle and release the lever.
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving.
D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.
—Adjusting second seats
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
44
D Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
passengers are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats. If you
are reclined, the lap belt may slide
past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or
your neck may contact the shoulder
belt. In the event of a frontal colli-
sion, the more the seat is reclined,
the greater the risk of death or per-
sonal injury.
D After adjusting the seat position, re-
lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.
D After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.
NOTICE
Do not fold the second seat seatback
forward with the luggage cover hooks
attached.
For easy access to the third seat:
1. Lift the lever on the side of the seat-
back and fold the seatback.
The seat will slide forward.
2. Move the seat to the front−most posi-
tion.
After passengers are in, lift up the seat-
back and return the seat until it locks.
CAUTION
After putting back the seat, try push-
ing the seat forward and rearward to
make sure it is secured in place.
To fold down the second seat after it has
been moved to access the third seat,
push the seatback up slightly and then
pull the seatback adjusting lever before
folding the seatback down. (See “—Fold-
ing down second seats” described below
for instructions about folding down the
second seat.)
—Moving second seat for
third seat access
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
45
Vehicles with third seat
Vehicles without third seat
BEFORE FOLDING DOWN SECOND
SEATS
1. Stow the center seat belt buckle of
the second seat as shown in the il-
lustration.
NOTICE
The seat belt buckle must be stowed
before you fold the second seat.
2. Make sure the outer seat belts
passes through the hangers when
folding the second seat.
This prevents the shoulder belt from being
damaged.
CAUTION
The seat belt must be removed from
the hangers when they are in use.
—Folding down second seats
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
46
FOLDING DOWN SECOND SEATS
(vehicles without third seat)
Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever
to unlock the seatback and fold the
seatback down until it locks.
The seat position returns to the rear−most
position when the seatback is folded
down.
CAUTION
Be careful that the seat does not hit
a passenger or luggage.
NOTICE
Do not fold the second seat seatback
forward with the luggage cover hooks
attached.
Folding down the second seats will en-
large the luggage compartment. See
“—Stowage precautions” on page 313 in
Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
CAUTION
When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the follow-
ing precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sud-
den stop:
D Make sure the seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.
D Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
47
FOLDING DOWN SECOND SEATS
(vehicles with third seat)
Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever
to unlock the seatback and fold the
seatback down until it locks.
Right side seat: The seat remains in posi-
tion when pushing the seat cushion back-
wards while folding down the seatback.
CAUTION
D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.
D After folding down the right side
seat, try pushing the seat forward
and rearward to make sure it is se-
cured in place.
NOTICE
Do not fold the second seat seatback
forward with the luggage cover hooks
attached.
Folding down the second seats will en-
large the luggage compartment.
If there is space between the second seat
and the folded third seat seatback, slide
the folded second seat to the rear−most
position.
CAUTION
After sliding the seat, try pushing the
seat forward and rearward to make
sure it is secured in place.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 313
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
48
CAUTION
When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the follow-
ing precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sud-
den stop:
D Make sure the seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.
D Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
From front
From rear
1. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
STRAP
Lean forward and pull the strap toward
you. Then lean back to the desired
angle and release the strap.
2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
LEVER
Pull down the lever, then adjust the
seatback to the desired angle and re-
lease the lever.
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving.
D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.
—Adjusting third seat
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
49
D Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
passengers are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats. If you
are reclined, the lap belt may slide
past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or
your neck may contact the shoulder
belt. In the event of a frontal colli-
sion, the more the seat is reclined,
the greater the risk of death or per-
sonal injury.
D After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.
BEFORE FOLDING DOWN THIRD SEAT
Make sure that the seat is clear of
people and luggage.
1. Stow the third seat seat belt buckles
as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE
The seat belt buckles must be stowed
before you fold the third seat.
—Folding down third seat
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
50
2. To stow the seat belt, insert the tabs
into the slot as shown above. Make
sure the tabs are securely locked in
the slot.
NOTICE
The seat belt must be stowed before
you fold the seatback.
From front
From rear
FOLDING DOWN THIRD SEAT
Lower the head restraints to the lowest
position. Pull the seatback angle adjust-
ing strap toward you or pull down the
seatback angle adjusting lever to un-
lock the seatback and fold the seatback
down until it locks.
CAUTION
Be careful that the seat does not hit
a passenger or luggage.
Folding down the third seat will enlarge
the luggage compartment. See “—Stowage
precautions” on page 313 in Section 2 for
precautions when loading luggage.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
51
RETURNING THIRD SEAT
Pull the seatback adjusting lever to un-
lock the seatback and fold up the seat-
back to its upright lock position.
CAUTION
When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the follow-
ing precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sud-
den stop:
D Make sure the seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.
D Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught under the seat
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
To flatten the seatbacks, do the follow-
ing:
1. Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up, sliding the second seat to the
rear−most position. Then pull the
seat forward slightly until it locks.
Flattening seatbacks
(manual seat)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
52
2. Remove the head restraint. Hold the
center of the lever and pull it up.
Then slide the front seat further for-
ward than the front−most lock posi-
tion.
3. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-
ver up to unlock and push down the
seatback.
When returning the seatback to the up-
right position, be careful not to make
yourself hit by the seatback which will
bound with considerable spring force.
After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.
CAUTION
D Do not allow passengers to ride on
the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.
D After returning the seat to its origi-
nal position, try pushing the seat
and seatback forward and rearward
to make sure it is secured in place.
Be certain to replace head restraint.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
53
To flatten the seatbacks, do the follow-
ing:
1. Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up, sliding the second seat to the
rear−most position. Then pull the
seat forward slightly until it locks.
2. Remove the head restraint. Push the
seat position adjusting switch for-
ward to slide the front seat to the
front−most position.
3. Move the seatback angle adjusting
switch backward to flatten the seat-
back.
After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.
Flattening seatbacks
(power seat)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
54
CAUTION
D Do not allow passengers to ride on
the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.
D After returning the seat to its origi-
nal position, try pushing the seat
and seatback forward and rearward
to make sure it is secured in place.
Be certain to replace head restraint.
To turn on the seat heater, push the
switches (“L” switch for the left front
seat and “R” switch for the right front
seat). At this time, the indicator light
will illuminate to indicate the seat heat-
er is operating.
To turn off the seat heater, push the
switch once again.
The key must be in the “ON” position to
operate seat heaters.
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when op-
erating the seat heater because it
may make them feel too hot or cause
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for;
D Babies, small children, elderly per-
sons, sick persons or persons with
physical disabilities
D Persons who have sensitive skin
D Persons who are exhausted
D Persons who have taken alcohol or
drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
drug, cold remedy, etc.)
To prevent the seat overheating, do
not use the seat heater with a blan-
ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-
jects which cover the seat.
Seat heaters
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
55
NOTICE
z Do not put unevenly weighed ob-
jects on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
z When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thin-
ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.). They may damage the heater
and seat surface.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, turn the switch off
when the engine is not running.
Front seats
Second seats
Third seats
For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving.
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.
Front head restraints only—On some mod-
els, you can also move the front head
restraint forward or backward. If such ad-
justment is desired, pull or push the base
of the head restraint.
Head restraints
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
56
Second and third seat head restraints—
When an occupant sits in the second or
third seat, always raise the head restraint
to the lock position.
The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION
D Adjust the center of the head re-
straint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.
D After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.
D Do not drive with the head re-
straints removed.
Front seats
Second seat
To use the armrest, pull it down as
shown in the illustrations.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest,
avoid putting heavy loads on it.
Armrests
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
57
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly re-
strained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle
are designed for people of adult size,
large enough to properly wear them.
Child. Use a child restraint system ap-
propriate for the child until the child be-
comes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”
on page 89 in this Section for details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-
tion of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.
Do not allow any children to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious in-
jury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit
on your lap. Holding a child in your arms
does not provide sufficient restraint.
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-
ry, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury or
death in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:
D Use the belt for only one person at
a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more people—even children.
D Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are
sitting up straight and well back in
the seats. If you are reclined, the
lap belt may slide past your hips
and apply restraint forces directly
to the abdomen or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt. In the
event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the great-
er the risk of death or personal in-
jury.
Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
58
D Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or doors.
D Inspect the belt system periodically.
Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be re-
placed. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.
D Keep the belts clean and dry. If
they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-
ers, or allow them to come into
contact with the belts—they may
severely weaken the belts. (See
“Cleaning the interior” on page 361
in Section 5.)
D Replace the belt assembly (includ-
ing bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.
Tab
Buckle
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up
straight and well back in the seat. To
fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-
tractor and insert the tab into the
buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-
pletely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This fea-
ture is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
restraint” on page 89 in this Section.) To
free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
CAUTION
D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from injury.
—Fastening front and rear
seat belts
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
59
Tak e u p
slack
Too h i g h
Keep as low on
hips as possible
Adjust the position of the lap and
shoulder belts.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips—not on your waist, then ad-
just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder
portion upward through the latch plate.
CAUTION
D Both high−positioned lap belts and
loose−fitting belts could cause seri-
ous injuries due to sliding under
the lap belt during a collision or
other unintended event. Keep the
lap belt positioned as low on hips
as possible.
D Do not place the shoulder belt un-
der your arm.
Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor—
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.
To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment make sure the anchor is
locked in position.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
60
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
serious injures in a collision.
To release the belt, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it re-
tracts.
THIRD SEAT SEAT BELTS
The third seat seat belts are 3−point type
restraint with 2 buckles. Both seat belt
buckles must be correctly located and se-
curely latched for proper operation.
Make sure buckle 1 is securely latched
for ready use of the third seat seat belt.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
61
Two buckles and tabs for third seat
seat belt
The two tabs have different shape for its
end so that the belt is not buckled in the
wrong place.
Buckle 1—Properly matches with con-
cave end tab
Buckle 2—Properly matches with round
end tab
CAUTION
Make sure the both buckles are cor-
rectly located and securely latched.
Failure to properly match the buckle
and tab may cause severe injury in
case of an accident or a collision.
To release the concave end tab, insert the
key into the hole on buckle 1 and allow
the belt to retract.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
62
CAUTION
Do not use the third seat seat belt
with either buckle released. Fastening
only the shoulder belt or lap belt may
cause severe personal injury in case
of sudden braking or a collision.
Second seat (vehicles with third seat)
Second seat (vehicles without third seat) Third seats
—Stowing the second and
third seat seat belt buckles
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
63
The second and third seat seat belt
buckles can be stowed when not in
use.
Seat belt buckles must be stowed before
you fold the seatback. (See “—Folding
down second seats” on page 45 and
“—Folding down third seat” on page 49 in
this Section.)
To stow the third seat seat belt, insert
the tabs into the slot as shown above.
Make sure the tabs are securely locked
in the slot.
Seat belt must be stowed before you fold
the seatback. (See “—Folding down third
seat” on page 49 in this Section.)
NOTICE
Stow the third seat seat belt when
not in use.
If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-
curely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is avail-
able from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer to
order the proper required length for the
extender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-
pect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering in-
formation is available at your Toyota deal-
er.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to follow these instructions
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of
an accident, increasing the chance of
personal injury.
D Remember that the extender pro-
vided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one origi-
nally intended.
—Stowing the third seat seat
belt
—Seat belt extender
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
64
D If the seat belt extender has been
connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-
bag system will judge that the driv-
er wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
D Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated when
using the seat belt extender for the
front passenger seat. If the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, disconnect the extender
tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt.
Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, the front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger side may not activate
correctly, causing death or serious
injury in the event of collision.
D Be sure to wear the seat belt with-
out the seat belt extender if you
can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
D Do not use the seat belt extender
when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passen-
ger seat. If installing a child re-
straint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
65
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle release buttons of the ex-
tender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extend-
er itself.
As far as the seat belt extender on the
front passenger side is concerned, do not
fail to disconnect the extender from the
seat belt after the above operation in or-
der to activate the front passenger airbag
correctly when getting into the vehicle
next time.
When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.
CAUTION
D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt and the seat belt extend-
er are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from injury.
Vehicles without curtain shield air-
bags—The driver and front passenger
seat belt pretensioners are designed to
be activated in response to a severe
frontal impact.
Vehicles with curtain shield airbags—
The driver and front passenger seat
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe fron-
tal impact or a vehicle roll over.
Vehicles without curtain shield airbags—
When the sensor detects a severe frontal
impact, the front seat belts are quickly
drawn back by the retractors so that the
belts snugly restrain the occupants.
—Seat belt pretensioners
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
66
Vehicles with curtain shield airbags—When
the sensor detects a severe frontal impact
or a vehicle roll over, the front seat belts
are quickly drawn back by the retractors
so that the belts snugly restrain the occu-
pants.
The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-
er will not activate if no passenger is
detected in the front passenger seat by
the front passenger occupant classification
system. However, the front passenger’s
seat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-
gage is put on the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 85 in this
Section.)
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-
bags may not operate together in all colli-
sions.
The seat belt pretensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components
and their locations are shown in the il-
lustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
4. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
5. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch
6. Airbag sensor assembly
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
sensor assembly consists of a safing sen-
sor and airbag sensor.
When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-
vated, an operating noise may be heard
and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have
been activated, the seat belt retractors
remain locked.
CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open
the seat belt pretensioner assemblies,
airbag sensor or surrounding area or
wiring. Failure to follow these instruc-
tions may prevent the seat belt pre-
tensioners from activating correctly,
cause sudden operation of the system
or disable the system, which could
result in death or serious injury. Con-
sult your Toyota dealer about any re-
pair and modification.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
67
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Repairs on or near the front seat
belt retractor assemblies
z Modification of the suspension sys-
tem
z Modification of the front end struc-
ture
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or con-
sole
This indicator comes on when the igni-
tion key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the seat belt pretensioners are
operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-
cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-
ors, warning light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see “Ser-
vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-
ers” on page 133 in Section 1−6.)
If any of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or remains on for more than 6
seconds or flashes.
D The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.
D If any seat belt does not retract or
cannot be pulled out due to a malfunc-
tion or activation of the relevant seat
belt pretensioner.
D The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
68
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:
D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the seat belt pretensioners to operate.
D Either seat belt pretensioner assembly
or surrounding area is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem) front airbags are designed to pro-
vide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by
the seat belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag system controls airbag deployment
power for the driver and front passenger.
The driver airbag system consists of the
driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front
passenger’s airbag system consists of the
front passenger occupant classification
sensor etc.
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating.
The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
head or chest caused by hitting the ve-
hicle interior.
The SRS front passenger airbag will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the front passenger seat. However, the
front passenger airbag may deploy if lug-
gage is put in the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up, regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 85 in this
Section.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.
SRS airbags—
—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
69
CAUTION
D The SRS front airbag system is de-
signed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems.
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move for-
ward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the colli-
sion. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wear-
ing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For in-
structions and precautions concern-
ing the seat belt system, see “Seat
belts” on page 57 in this Section.
D Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploy-
ing airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child restraint system. Toyota
strongly recommends that all in-
fants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and proper-
ly restrained. The rear seat is the
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installa-
tion of a child restraint system, see
“Child restraint” on page 89 in this
Section.
The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-
sions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the ve-
hicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the de-
signed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the ve-
hicle is very close to the designed thresh-
old level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
70
Collision from the rear
Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover
The SRS front airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-
volved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-
ployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.
Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface
Falling into or
jumping over a
deep hole
Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the under-
side of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
The SRS front airbag system consists
mainly of the following components, and
their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-
cator lights
5. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch
7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
71
8. Driver’s seat position sensor
9. Airbag sensor assembly
10. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
The front airbag sensors constantly moni-
tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.
If an impact results in a forward decelera-
tion beyond the designed threshold level,
the system triggers the airbag inflators. At
this time a chemical reaction in the infla-
tors very quickly fills the airbags with
non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward
motion of the occupants. The front airbags
then quickly deflate, so that there is no
obstruction of the driver’s vision should it
be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so imme-
diately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious inju-
ries, primarily to the head and chest, it
may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
are usually in the nature of minor burns
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
a deploying airbag can cause more seri-
ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s
hands, arms, chest or head is in close
proximity to the airbag module at the time
of deployment. This is why it is important
for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
occupant and the airbag module; sit
straight and well back into the seat; wear
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the ve-
hicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflat-
ing airbag.
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:
D The driver sit as far back as pos-
sible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the ve-
hicle.
D The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.
D All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.
For instructions and precautions con-
cerning the seating position, see
“—Front seat precautions” on page
38 in this Section.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
72
D Do not sit on the edge of the seat
or lean against the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use, since the
front passenger airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates,
can be killed or seriously injured.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt
properly.
D Toyota strongly recommends that all
infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.
D Do not hold a child on your lap or
in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instruc-
tions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 89 in this Sec-
tion.
D Do not put anything or any part of
your body on or in front of the
dashboard or steering wheel pad
that houses the front airbag sys-
tem. They might restrict inflation or
cause death or serious injury as
they are projected rearward by the
force of the deploying airbags. Like-
wise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
73
D Do not modify or remove any wir-
ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, dashboard
near the front passenger airbag,
front passenger airbag cover, front
passenger airbag or airbag sensor
assembly. Doing so may prevent the
front airbag system from activating
correctly, cause sudden activation
of the system or disable the sys-
tem, which could result in death or
serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability,
consult your Toyota dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS
front airbags operation.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension sys-
tem
z Modification of the front end struc-
ture
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, con-
sole, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag
This indicator comes on when the igni-
tion key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS front airbags are oper-
ating properly.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
74
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-
cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-
ors, warning light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see “Ser-
vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-
ers” on page 133 in Section 1−6.)
If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or remains on for more than 6
seconds or flashes.
D The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the
SRS driver and front passenger airbag
system and/or front passenger occupant
classification system and “AIRBAG ON”
and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights have a
problem. If the light flashes, the SRS side
airbag system and/or curtain shield airbag
system have a problem.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light will come on if there is a
malfunction in the front passenger occu-
pant classification system.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:
D The SRS front airbags have been in-
flated.
D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.
D The pad section of the steering wheel
or front passenger airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
75
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passen-
ger and second outside passengers in
addition to the primary safety protec-
tion provided by the seat belts.
In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags work with the seat belts to help
reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side
airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s or front passenger’s chest and the
SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-
senger’s or second outside passenger’s
head.
The SRS side airbag on the passenger
seat will not activate if there is no pas-
senger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the side airbag on the passen-
ger seat may deploy if luggage is put in
the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up
regardless of the presence of the occu-
pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-
ger occupant classification system, see
“—Front passenger occupant classification
system” on page 85 in this Section.)
The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-
senger side are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat or second out-
side seat.
—SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
76
Roll sensing function:
In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-
tain shield airbags on both sides work
with the seat belts to help reduce injury
by inflating. The curtain shield airbags
help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,
front passenger’s or second outside pas-
senger’s head and help prevent them from
being thrown out of the vehicle.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-
vate even when the side airbags are not
activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
CAUTION
D The SRS side airbag and curtain
shield airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the prima-
ry protection of the driver, front
passenger and second outside pas-
senger seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident,
the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt prop-
erly during an accident reduces the
chances of death or serious injury
or being thrown out of the vehicle.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seat belt system,
see “Seat belts” on page 57 in this
Section.
D Do not allow anyone to lean his/her
head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof
side rail from which the SRS side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
deploy even if he/she is a child
seated in the child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the SRS side air-
bag and/or curtain shield airbag in-
flate, and the impact of the deploy-
ing airbag could cause death or se-
rious injury to the occupant.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
77
D Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploy-
ing airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child restraint system. Toyota
strongly recommends that all in-
fants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and prop-
erly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint sys-
tem, see “Child restraint” on page
89 in this Section.
The SRS side airbags may not activate
if the vehicle is subjected to a collision
from the side at certain angles, or a
collision to the side of the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
as shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
Collision from the rear
Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover
The SRS side airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-
volved in a front or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed side collision.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
78
The SRS curtain shield airbags may not
activate if the vehicle is subjected to a
collision from the side at certain
angles, or a collision to the side of the
vehicle body other than the passenger
compartment as shown in the illustra-
tion.
The SRS curtain shield airbags are de-
signed to inflate when the passenger
compartment area suffers a severe impact
from the side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
The angle of
vehicle tip−up
is marginal
Skidding vehicle
hitting a curb
stone
The SRS curtain shield airbags may in-
flate if the angle of vehicle tip−up is
marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s
tires hit a curb stone laterally as shown
in the illustration.
Collision from
the front
Collision from
the rear
Pitch end over end
The SRS curtain shield airbags are not
generally designed to inflate if the ve-
hicle is involved in a front or rear colli-
sion, if it pitches end over end, or if
it is involved in a low−speed side colli-
sion.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
79
Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface
Falling into or
jumping over a
deep hole
Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
may deploy if a serious impact occurs
to the underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system consists mainly of the fol-
lowing components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
1. SRS warning light
2. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-
cator lights
3. Curtain shield airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
6. Curtain shield airbag sensors
7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
8. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch
9. Airbag sensor assembly
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-
sembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.
In a severe side impact, the side and
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain
shield airbag inflators. At this time a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help
restrain the lateral motion of the occu-
pants.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so imme-
diately.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
80
Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious inju-
ries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as parts of the front
and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be
hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags
are designed to inflate only once.
CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they in-
flate, the driver, front passenger and
second outside passengers must:
D Wear their seat belts properly.
D Remain properly seated with their
backs upright and against the seats
at all times.
D Do not allow anyone to lean against
the door when the vehicle is in use,
since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with con-
siderable speed and force. Other-
wise, he/she may be killed or seri-
ously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have
a small child in the vehicle.
D Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag, and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.
D Do not allow anyone to get his/her
head closer to the area where the
side airbag and curtain shield air-
bag inflate, since these airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken espe-
cially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
81
D Do not allow anyone to kneel on
the passenger seat, facing the pas-
senger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken espe-
cially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.
D Do not allow anyone to get his/her
head or hands out of windows
since the curtain shield airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken espe-
cially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.
D Do not attach a cup holder or any
other device or object on or around
the door. When the side airbag in-
flates, the cup holder or any other
device or object will be thrown with
great force or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in
death or serious injury. Likewise,
the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
82
D Do not attach a microphone or any
other device or object around the
area where the curtain shield airbag
activates such as on the windshield
glass, side door glass, front and
rear pillars, roof side rail and assist
grips. When the curtain shield air-
bag inflates, the microphone or oth-
er device or object will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate cor-
rectly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or
sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate cor-
rectly, resulting in death or serious
injury. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook direct-
ly.
D Do not use seat accessories which
cover the parts where the side air-
bags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from acti-
vating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.
D Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such changes may prevent
the side airbag system from activat-
ing correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate ac-
cidentally, resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
D Do not disassemble or repair the
front and rear pillars and roof side
rail containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable
the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags to inflate accidental-
ly, resulting in death or serious in-
jury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability,
consult your Toyota dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS
side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags operation.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
83
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system in some cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension sys-
tem
z Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment
z Repairs made on or near the con-
sole or front seat
This indicator comes on when the igni-
tion key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-
cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-
ors, warning light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see “Ser-
vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-
ers” on page 133 in Section 1−6.)
If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or remains on for more than 6
seconds or flashes.
D The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
84
If the light stays on, it indicates that the
SRS driver and front passenger airbag
system and/or front passenger occupant
classification system and “AIRBAG ON”
and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights have a
problem. If the light flashes, the SRS side
airbag system and/or curtain shield airbag
system have a problem.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light will come on if there is a
malfunction in the front passenger occu-
pant classification system.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:
D Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-
tain shield airbags have been inflated.
D The portion of the doors (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
D The surface of the seats with the side
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
D The portion of the front pillars, rear
pillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-
ding) containing the curtain shield air-
bags inside (shaded in the illustration)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
85
Your vehicle is equipped with a front
passenger occupant classification sys-
tem. This system detects the conditions
1—4 in the table on page 87 and based
on these conditions activates or deacti-
vates the following systems;
D Front passenger airbag
D Side airbag on the front passenger
seat
D Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-
er
The system monitors the weight and
load on the front passenger seat, and
the seat belt buckle switch to determine
conditions 1—4.
In order for the system to detect the
conditions correctly, do not do any of
the following:
D Apply a heavy load to the front pas-
senger seat or equipment (e.g. armrest
or seatback pocket).
D Attach a commercial seatback table,
etc. to the front passenger seat seat-
back.
D Put weight on the front passenger seat
by putting your hands or feet on the
seatback from the rear passenger seat.
The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights indicate the actuation of
the front passenger airbag, side airbag
on the front passenger seat and front
passenger’s seat belt pretensioner.
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will be
illuminated when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position with the condition 2 in
the table shown below.
If the front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system determines that a person of
adult size sits in the front passenger seat
but the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, one of the following is likely
to have occurred:
D A rear passenger lifts the front passen-
ger seat cushion with their legs.
D Objects are placed under the front pas-
senger seat.
D The front passenger seatback is in
contact with the second seat.
To ensure the system correctly detects an
adult sitting in the front passenger seat,
make sure the above do not occur.
Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated when an adult is
seated in the front passenger seat. If the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illumina-
ted, ask the passenger to sit up straight,
well back in the seat, and with the seat
belt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light still remains illuminated, ei-
ther ask the passenger to move to the
rear seat, or if that is not possible, move
the front passenger seat fully rearward.
—Front passenger occupant
classification system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
86
The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights will be illuminated ini-
tially when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. After about 4 sec-
onds, they will go off. After that, the
front passenger occupant classification
system operates and judges which indi-
cator light be illuminated.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light will come on if
there is a malfunction in the front pas-
senger occupant classification system.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
87
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Condition detected
by the front
passenger occupant
classification system
Indicator/warning light Devices
“AIRBAG ON” and
“AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning
light
Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder light
Front
passenger
airbag
Side airbag
on the front
passenger
seat
Curtain shield
airbag in the
front
passenger
side
Front
passenger’s
seat belt
pretensioner
1. Adult
∗
1
“AIRBAG ON” Off Flashing
∗
4
Activated
2. Child
∗
2
or child
restraint system
∗
3
“AIRBAG OFF” Off Flashing
∗
4
Deactivated
Activated
Activated
3. Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated
4. There is a
malfunction in the
system
“AIRBAG OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated
∗
1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
∗
2
: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
∗
3
: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 89 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)
∗
4
: In the event that the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
88
CAUTION
To avoid potential death or serious
injury when the front passenger occu-
pant classification system does not
detect the conditions correctly, ob-
serve the following.
D Do not recline the front passenger
seat seatback so that it interferes
with a second seat as it may cause
the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light
be illuminated. If the seatback inter-
feres with the second seat, return
the seatback to a position where it
does not interfere with the second
seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback
as upright as possible when the ve-
hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-
back excessively may lessen the ef-
fectiveness of the seat belt system.
D Make sure the “AIRBAG ON” indica-
tor light is illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front
passenger seat. If the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
disconnect the extender tongue
from the seat belt buckle, then re-
connect the seat belt. Reconnect
the seat belt extender after making
sure the “AIRBAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If you use the
seat belt extender while the “AIR-
BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front pas-
senger side may not activate cor-
rectly, which could cause death or
serious injury in the event of colli-
sion.
D If an adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light should be illumi-
nated. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, ask
the passenger to sit up straight,
well back in the seat, feet on the
floor, and with the seat belt worn
correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light still remains illumi-
nated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is
not possible, move the front
passenger seat fully rearward.
D Wear the seat belt properly.
D Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt tab has not been left in-
serted into the buckle before some-
one sits in the front passenger
seat.
D Do not apply a heavy load to the
front passenger or equipment (e.g.
armrest or seatback pocket).
D Do not put weight on the front pas-
senger seat by putting your hands
or feet on the front passenger seat
seatback from the rear passenger
seat.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
89
D Do not let a rear passenger lift the
front passenger seat with their feet
or press on the seatback with their
legs.
D Do not put objects under the front
passenger seat.
D Child restraint systems installed on
the second seat should not contact
the front seatbacks.
D When it is unavoidable to install the
forward−facing child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (As for the installation
order, see “—Installation with seat
belt” on page 92 in this Section.)
D Do not remove the front seats.
D Do not kick the front passenger
seat or subject it to severe impact.
Otherwise, the SRS warning light
may come on to indicate a malfunc-
tion of the detection system. In this
case, contact your Toyota dealer im-
mediately.
The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may be
illuminated (the front passenger airbag and
side airbag on the front passenger seat
may deploy) even if observing the above
cautions, when a child sits in, or a for-
ward−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat. Re-
fer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” on
page 68 and “Child restraint” on page 89
in this Section.
Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-
propriate child restraint systems for
children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on
page 57 in this Section for details.
CAUTION
D For effective protection in automo-
bile accidents and sudden stops, a
child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an acci-
dent, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.
Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
90
D Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. Accord-
ing to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.
D Never install a rear−facing child re-
straint system on the front passen-
ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the force of
the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.
D A forward−facing child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously in-
jured.
D On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and/or curtain shield airbag
inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
D Do not use the seat belt extender
when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passen-
ger seat. If installing a child re-
straint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.
D Make sure that you have complied
with all installation instructions pro-
vided by the child restraint
manufacturer and that the system is
properly secured. If it is not se-
cured properly, it may cause death
or serious injury to the child in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
91
A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap por-
tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
carefully consult the manufacturer’s in-
structions which accompany the child
restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufactur-
er’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from in-
juring passengers in the event of a sud-
den stop or accident.
Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-
curing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the an-
chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on
page 103 in this Section.
The child restraint lower anchorages ap-
proved for your vehicle may also be used.
See “—Installation with child restraint low-
er anchorages” on page 105 in this Sec-
tion.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
—Child restraint system
—Types of child restraint
system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
92
(C) Booster seat
(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.
CAUTION
D Never install a rear−facing child re-
straint system on the front passen-
ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the impact of
the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.
—Installation with seat belt
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
93
D Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem on the second (or third) seat if
it interferes with the lock mecha-
nism of the front (or second) seats.
Otherwise, the child or front (or
second) seat occupant(s) may be
killed or seriously injured in case
of sudden braking or a collision.
D If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child re-
straint system on the right second
seat.
Same angle Same position
D When installing a child restraint
system in the second seat center
position, adjust both seat cushions
to the same position and align both
seatbacks at the same angle. Other-
wise, the child restraint system can-
not be securely restrained and this
may cause death or serious injuries
in a collision.
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufactur-
er and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
94
CAUTION
D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly
against the seat cushion and seatback,
let the shoulder belt retract as far as
it will go to hold the infant seat secure-
ly.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
95
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint sys-
tem in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.
4. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passen-
ger.
(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in for-
ward−facing or rear−facing position de-
pending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions about the
applicable age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
96
Install the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat only when it is un-
avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a
front passenger occupant classification
system. In order to activate the occupant
classification system correctly, install the
forward−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the following
order:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-
tion.
2. Move the front passenger seat to the
rearward position.
3. Put the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat without putting
your weight on the front passenger
seat.
4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat
belt buckle.
5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended. To hold the seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.
6. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convert-
ible seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint sys-
tem in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.
7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-
tem and secure the child, complying
with the instructions provided by the
child restraint system manufacturer.
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light should
be illuminated when the ignition key is
“ON” and the child is in the child restraint
system after following these procedures.
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light indi-
cates the SRS front passenger airbag and
side airbag on the passenger side will not
deploy. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light
is illuminated, remove the child restraint
system and reinstall it with the ignition
key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If
the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illumi-
nated when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position, then the SRS front pas-
senger airbag and side airbag on the pas-
senger side may deploy in an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle in this condition.
Remove the child restraint system and
contact your Toyota dealer.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
97
CAUTION
D Never install a rear−facing child re-
straint system on the front passen-
ger seat. A forward−facing child re-
straint system should only be
installed on the front passenger
seat when unavoidable. If you must
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, put the
seat in its most rearward position,
and install the forward−facing child
restraint system in the proper or-
der. Otherwise, the front passenger
occupant classification system can
not detect the presence of the child
restraint system and the front pas-
senger airbag and side airbag on
the front passenger seat could
deploy.
D Never install a rear−facing child re-
straint system on the front passen-
ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the impact of
the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.
Move seat
fully back
D A forward−facing child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously in-
jured.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
98
D On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and/or curtain shield airbag
inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
D Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem on the second (or third) seat if
it interferes with the lock mecha-
nism of the front (or second) seats.
Otherwise, the child or front (or
second) seat occupant(s) may be
killed or seriously injured in case
of sudden braking or a collision.
D If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child re-
straint system on the right second
seat.
Same angle
Same position
D When installing a child restraint
system in the second seat center
position, adjust both seat cushions
to the same position and align both
seatbacks at the same angle. Other-
wise, the child restraint system can-
not be securely restrained and this
may cause death or serious injuries
in a collision.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
99
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.
CAUTION
D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
100
3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convert-
ible seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint sys-
tem in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.
4. To remove the convertible seat, press
the buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passen-
ger.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
101
(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
A booster seat must be used in for-
ward−facing position only.
Move seat
fully back
CAUTION
D A forward−facing child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously in-
jured.
D On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and/or curtain shield airbag
inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
102
Same angle
Same position
D When installing a child restraint
system in the second seat center
position, adjust both seat cushions
to the same position and align both
seatbacks at the same angle. Other-
wise, the child restraint system can-
not be securely restrained and this
may cause death or serious injuries
in a collision.
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run
the lap and shoulder belt through or
around the booster seat and across the
child following the instructions provided
by its manufacturer and insert the tab
into the buckle taking care not to twist
the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly
across the child’s shoulder and that the
lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 57 in this Section for details.
CAUTION
D Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sud-
den braking or a collision.
D Both high−positioned lap belts and
loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on a child’s hips as possible.
D For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.
D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
103
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.
2. To remove the booster seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract.
Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.
—Using a top strap
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
104
Anchor brackets
Symbol
Use the anchor brackets behind the sec-
ond seat seatbacks to secure the top
strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
seating position of the second seat.
This symbol indicates the locations of
user ready anchor brackets.
TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Remove the head restraint.
2. Open the anchor bracket cover with
the symbol as shown in the illustra-
tion.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
105
3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child re-
straint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 89 in this Section.
CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child re-
straint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
4. Replace the head restraint and lift it
up to the uppermost lock position.
Be sure to close the cover when the an-
chor bracket is not in use.
Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or CMVSS210.2 specifications are
installed in the second seat.
The anchorages are installed in the seat
cushion of both outside second seats.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.
—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
106
3rd lock
position
1st lock
position
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
1. Fold down the seatback and back to
the 1st lock position (most upright
position) until it locks into place.
Adjust the seatback to the 3rd lock
position.
Make sure the seatback is locked secure-
ly.
Canada only
Type A
Canada only
Type B
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
107
2. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower an-
chorages near the button on the
seatback.
3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.
For owners in Canada—The symbol on
a child restraint system indicates the pres-
ence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 103 in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruc-
tion manual equipped with each product.
CAUTION
D When using the lower anchorages
for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular ob-
jects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.
D Push and pull the child restraint
system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.
D When using the lower anchorages
for the child restraint system, en-
sure that the seat is moved to the
rear−most position, with the seat-
back close to the child restraint
system.
D After securing the child restraint
system, never slide or recline the
seat.
D Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem on the second seat if it inter-
feres with the lock mechanism of
the front seats. Otherwise, the child
or front seat occupant(s) may be
killed or seriously injured in case
of sudden braking or a collision.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
108
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
109
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors
Tilt steering wheel 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1− 4
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
110
To change the steering wheel angle,
hold the steering wheel, push down the
lock release lever, tilt the steering
wheel to the desired angle and return
the lever to its original position.
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishan-
dle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
D After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the side of your vehicle in the mir-
ror.
Be careful when judging the size or dis-
tance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
On some models, when you push the out-
side rear view mirror defogger switch, the
heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror sur-
face. (See “Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers and windshield wip-
er de−icer” on page 126 in Section 1−5.)
Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
111
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious inju-
ries.
D Since the mirror surfaces can get
hot, do not touch them when the
defogger switch is on.
To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
(right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direc-
tion.
Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is
in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mir-
ror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.
—Power rear view mirror
control
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
112
The rear view mirrors can be folded
backward for parking in compact areas.
To fold the rear view mirror, push back-
ward.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the mirrors folded
backward. Both the driver and pas-
senger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-
ror.
To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.
Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the ve-
hicle and an accident may occur re-
sulting in death or serious injuries.
—Folding rear view mirrors
Anti−glare inside rear view
mirror
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
113
Type A
Type B
Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-
ror.
This mirror is equipped with auto anti−
glare function. The function is designed
to reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving.
When the ignition key is inserted and
turned on, the inside rear view mirror al-
ways turns on in the automatic function
mode.
The indicator illuminates to show you that
the function is on.
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.
To turn off the automatic function:
Type A—Push the “OFF” switch.
Type B—Push the “MIRROR” switch.
To turn on the automatic function again:
Type A—Push the “AUTO” switch.
Type B—Push the “MIRROR” switch.
Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is in the best condition.
When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the ve-
hicle and an accident may occur re-
sulting in death or serious injuries.
Auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
114
Type A
Type B
To ensure correct functioning of anti−
glare mirror sensors located on both
sides of the mirror, do not touch or
cover the sensors with your finger or
a piece of cloth, etc.
To block out glare, move the sun visor.
To block out glare from the front—Swing
down the sun visor (position 1).
To block out glare from the side—Swing
down the sun visor, remove it from the
hook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-
tion 2).
If glare comes from obliquely behind you,
extend the plate at the end of the visor
(position 3).
Sun visors—
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
115
CAUTION
Do not extend the plate at the end of
the sun visor when the visor is in the
position 1. It can cover the anti−glare
inside rear view mirror and obstruct
the rear view.
Type A
Type B
To use the vanity mirrors, swing down
the main sun visor and slide the cover.
Type A only—The vanity light comes on
when you slide the cover.
—Vanity mirrors
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
116
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
117
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlights and turn signals 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flashers 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch light 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers and windshield
wiper de−icer
126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1− 5
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
118
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
Position 2—Headlights and all of the
above
Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all
of the lights in position 1
They automatically turn on or off depend-
ing on the darkness of the surroundings.
Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are need-
ed immediately when entering a dark tun-
nel, parking structure, etc.
The automatic light control sensor is on
the top of the driver’s side instrument
panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. To
turn them on again, turn the key to the
“ON” position or actuate the headlight
switch. If you are going to park for over
one week, make sure the headlight switch
is off.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.
Daytime running light system
(on some models)
The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-
ty when the parking brake is released with
the engine started, even with the light
switch in the “OFF” position. They will not
go off until the ignition switch is turned
off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
position 1.
Twist the knob to position 2 to turn the
headlights to full intensity for driving at
night.
Headlights and turn signals
(with automatic light control
system)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
119
High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-
ward you (position 2) for low beams.
The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.
Flashing the high beam headlights
(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way
back. The high beam headlights turn off
when you release the lever.
You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.
TURN SIGNALS
To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 398 in Section 7−3.
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
Position 2—Headlights and all of the
above
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
turned off. To turn them on again, turn the
key to the “ON” position or actuate the
headlight switch. If you are going to park
for over one week, make sure the head-
light switch is off.
Headlights and turn signals
(without automatic light
control system)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
120
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.
Daytime running light system
(on some models)
The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-
ty when the parking brake is released with
the engine started, even with the light
switch in the “OFF” position. They will not
go off until the ignition switch is turned
off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
position 1.
Twist the knob to position 2 to turn the
headlights to full intensity for driving at
night.
High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-
ward you (position 2) for low beams.
The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.
Flashing the high beam headlights
(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way
back. The high beam headlights turn off
when you release the lever.
You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.
TURN SIGNALS
To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 398 in Section 7−3.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
121
To turn on the emergency flashers,
push the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as pos-
sible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operat-
ing.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the en-
gine is not running.
To adjust the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights, turn the knob.
Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
122
To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight and turn sig-
nal switch lever. They will come on
only when the headlights are on low
beam.
To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—
Center: Turns the light on when any of the
side doors and back door are opened.
Rear: Turns the light on when the back
door is opened.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
(center interior light)
When the switch is in the “DOOR” posi-
tion and any of the side doors and back
door is opened, the light will come on.
After all the side doors and back door are
closed, the light remains on for about 15
seconds before fading out.
However, in the following cases, the light
fades out immediately:
D All the side doors and back door are
closed when the ignition key is in
“ACC” or “ON” position.
D The ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“ON” after all the side doors and back
door are closed.
D All the side doors and back door are
locked when the light is still on.
When all the side doors and back door
are unlocked using either the key or the
wireless remote control transmitter simul-
taneously, the light will come on and re-
main on for about 15 seconds before fad-
ing out.
Front fog lights Interior lights
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
123
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
D Cancelling the door key or wireless re-
mote control transmitter linked opera-
tion
D Changing the timing for the light turn-
ing off
With moon roof
Without moon roof
The personal lights operate separately
with each lens.
To turn on the light, push the lens on your
side. To turn the light off, push the lens
once again.
The center switch has the following posi-
tions:
“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any of
the side doors or back door is opened.
“OFF”—The lights are off.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
When the switch is in the “DOOR” posi-
tion and any of the side doors and back
door is opened, the light will come on.
After all the side doors and back door are
closed, the light remains on for about 15
seconds before fading out.
However, in the following cases, the light
fades out immediately:
D All the side doors and back door are
closed when the ignition key is in
“ACC” or “ON” position.
D The ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“ON” after all the side doors and back
door are closed.
D All the side doors and back door are
locked when the light is still on.
Personal lights
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
124
When all the side doors and back door
are unlocked using either the key or the
wireless remote control transmitter simul-
taneously, the light will come on and re-
main on for about 15 seconds before fad-
ing out.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
D Cancelling the door key or wireless re-
mote control transmitter linked opera-
tion
D Changing the timing for the light turn-
ing off
For easy access to the ignition switch,
the ignition switch light comes on when
any of the side doors are opened.
The light remains on for some time after
all the side doors and back door are
closed.
However, in the following cases, the lights
go off immediately.
D All the side doors and back door are
closed when the ignition key is in
“ACC” or “ON” position.
D The ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“ON” after all the side doors and back
door are closed.
D All the side doors and back door are
closed and locked when the light is still
on.
When all the side doors and back door
are unlocked using either the key or the
wireless remote control transmitter simul-
taneously, the light will come on and re-
main on for about 15 seconds before fad-
ing out.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
D Cancelling the door key or wireless re-
mote control transmitter linked opera-
tion
D Changing the timing for the light turn-
ing off
Ignition switch light
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
125
To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
Lever position Speed setting
Position 1 Intermittent
Position 2 Slow
Position 3 Fast
For a single sweep of the windshield,
push the lever up and release it.
The “INT” band lets you adjust the wiping
time interval when the wiper lever is in
the intermittent position (position 1). Twist
the band upward to increase the time be-
tween sweeps, and downward to decrease
it.
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 397 in
Section 7−3.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the wind-
shield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.
When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
the washer nozzles do not become
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
contact your Toyota dealer to have the
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Windshield wipers and washer
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
126
To turn on the rear window wiper, twist
the lever knob upward.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
Lever position Speed setting
Position 1 Intermittent
Position 2 Normal
To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,
twist the knob upward or downward as far
as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob
automatically returns from these positions
after you release it. The rear window wip-
er operates while the washer squirts.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 397 in
Section 7−3.
NOTICE
Do not operate the rear wiper if the
rear window is dry. It may scratch the
glass.
Without navigation system (type A)
Without navigation system (type B)
Rear window wiper and
washer
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers and
windshield wiper de−icer
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
127
With navigation system
To defog or defrost the rear window,
push the switch.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
rear window will quickly clear the window
surface. An indicator light will illuminate to
indicate the defogger is operating.
On some models, the outside rear view
mirror defoggers and/or the windshield
wiper de−icer is also operating simulta-
neously by this switch. Vehicles with the
outside rear view mirror defoggers, the
heater panel in the outside rear view mir-
rors will quickly clear the surfaces. Ve-
hicles with the windshield wiper de−icer,
the windshield wiper blades will be de−
iced.
Push the switch once again to turn the
defoggers off.
The system will automatically shut off af-
ter the defogger has operated about 15
minutes.
CAUTION
Vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers, since the mirror surfaces
can get hot, do not touch them when
the defogger switch is on.
Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear or the wiper
blades have de−iced. Leaving the defog-
gers on for a long time could cause the
battery to discharge, especially during
stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-
ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icer
before operating the switch.
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connec-
tors.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
128
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
129
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meters 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1− 6
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
130
Low fuel level
warning light
The gauge indicates the approximate
quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
when the ignition switch is on.
Nearly full—Needle at “F”
Nearly empty—Needle at “E”
It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
The needle moves when braking, acceler-
ating or making turns. This is caused by
the movement of the fuel in the tank.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the move-
ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the ignition switch is
on. The engine operating temperature
will vary with changes in weather and
engine load.
If the needle moves into the red zone,
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:
D Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
D Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.
D Idling for a long period with the air
conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.
Fuel gauge
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
131
D Towing a trailer.
NOTICE
z Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to con-
trol the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.
z Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See “If your ve-
hicle overheats” on page 336 in
Section 4.
The tachometer indicates engine speed
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent en-
gine lugging and over−revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.
This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.
1. Odometer—Shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-
trical power source is disconnected.
Tachometer Odometer and two trip meters
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
132
3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.
To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-
play the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
133
If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.
(a)
or
(indicator and buzzer)
If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
(b)
(indicator and buzzer)
Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(c)
Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.
(d)
Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
(e)
Stop and check.
(f)
or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
(g)
Low fuel level warning light
Fill up tank.
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
134
If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.
(h)
or
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
(i)
(indicator and buzzer)
Close all side doors and back door.
(j)
Stop and check.
(k)
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.
(l)
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
(m)
Adjust tire inflation pressure and turn off warning light by pushing reset switch for a
few seconds. If warning light remains, contact Toyota dealer.
(n)
Add washer fluid.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
135
If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.
(o)
Replace engine oil.
(p)
Key reminder buzzer
Remove key.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
136
(a) Brake System Warning Light and
Buzzer
This light comes on in the following cases
when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
D When the parking brake is applied...
This light comes on for a few seconds
when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position even after the parking brake
is released.
If the vehicles speed rises above 5 km/h
(3 mph) with the parking brake applied, a
buzzer sounds.
D When the brake fluid level is low...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.
Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following cases:
D The light does not come on even if the
parking brake is applied when the igni-
tion key is in the “ON” position.
D The light does not come on even if the
ignition key is turned on with the park-
ing brake released.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If either of the following conditions
occurs, immediately stop your vehicle
at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
D The light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running.
In this case, the brakes may not
work properly and your stopping
distance will become longer. De-
press the brake pedal firmly and
bring the vehicle to an immediate
stop.
D The brake system warning light re-
mains on together with the “ABS”
warning light.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely un-
stable during braking.
(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
the reminder light flashes and buzzer
sounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fas-
tened. Unless the driver fastens the belt,
the light continues flashing and the buzzer
stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt
Reminder Light
The light acts as a reminder to have the
front passenger buckle up the seat belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
the reminder light flashes if a passenger
sits in the front passenger seat and does
not fasten the seat belt.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight, the reminder light may flash.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
137
(d) Charging System Warning Light
This warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, and goes off when the engine is
started.
When there are problems in the charging
system while the engine is running, the
warning light comes on.
NOTICE
When the charging system warning
light comes on while the engine is
running, malfunctions such as the en-
gine drive belt being broken may have
occurred. If the warning light comes
on, immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.
(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
This light warns that the engine oil pres-
sure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are
driving, pull off the road to a safe place
and stop the engine immediately. Call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when
the engine is idling or it may come on
briefly after a hard stop. There is no
cause for concern if it then goes out when
the engine is accelerated slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.
(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position and
goes off after the engine starts. This
means that the warning light system is
operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp
comes on while driving, first check the
followings.
D Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-
ately.
D Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely
tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
138
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel
tank cap is not loose...
D There is a problem somewhere in the
engine, emission control system, elec-
tronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warn-
ing light system itself.
In this case, slow down and have your
vehicle checked/repaired by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the elec-
tronic throttle control system.
At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-
er, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erro-
neous pedal operation.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) programs
Your vehicle may not pass a state
emission inspection if the malfunction
indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
emission control system and OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) system before
taking your vehicle for the inspection.
For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 370
in Section 6.
(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the move-
ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
(h) “ABS” Warning Light
The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−
lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the
system malfunctions, the light comes on
again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system, the brake assist
system, the traction control system and
the vehicle stability control system do not
operate, but the brake system still oper-
ates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
139
If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the components moni-
tored by the warning light system. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, or remains on.
D The light comes on while you are driv-
ing.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warn-
ing light, immediately stop your ve-
hicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unsta-
ble during braking.
(i) Open Door Warning Light and Buzz-
er
This light remains on until all the side
doors and back door are completely
closed.
If the vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h
(3 mph) with any door open, a buzzer
sounds.
(j) Automatic Transmission Fluid
Temperature Warning Light
(four−wheel drive models)
This light warns that the automatic trans-
mission fluid temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driv-
ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop
the vehicle at a safe place and put the
selector lever in “P”. With the engine id-
ling, wait until the light goes off. If the
light goes off, you can start the vehicle
again. If the light does not go off, call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.
NOTICE
Continued driving with the warning
light on may damage the automatic
transmission.
(k) SRS Warning Light
This indicator comes on when the igni-
tion key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS front airbags and seat
belt pretensioners are operating proper-
ly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-
cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-
ors, warning light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or remains on for more than 6
seconds or flashes.
D The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
140
If the light stays on, it indicates that the
SRS driver and front passenger airbag
system and/or front passenger occupant
classification system and “AIRBAG ON”
and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights have a
problem. If the light flashes, the SRS side
airbag system and/or curtain shield airbag
system have a problem.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light will come on if there is a
malfunction in the front passenger occu-
pant classification system.
(l) “VSC” Warning Light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle stability control
system or traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after
a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
system does not work. However, as con-
ventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driv-
ing.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light comes on while driv-
ing.
Two−wheel drive models only—The “TRAC
OFF” indicator light will come on when the
“VSC” warning light comes on even if the
“TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.
(m) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light warns that the tire inflation pres-
sure is critically low. The light comes on
when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position. It goes off after a few sec-
onds. This indicates that the low tire pres-
sure warning system is functioning proper-
ly.
If the light comes on while driving, adjust
tire inflation pressure to the specified lev-
el. (See “Tires” on page 408 in Section 8.)
After the tire inflation pressure is adjusted,
push the tire pressure warning system re-
set switch for a few seconds and make
sure the warning light goes off. If the light
still remains or blinks once every second,
have the low tire pressure warning system
checked at your Toyota dealer.
If the light blinks twice every second, the
low tire pressure warning system needs to
be initialized.
For details, see “Tire pressure warning
system” on page 159 in Section 1−7.
(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Warning Light
The light warns that the windshield washer
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at
your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 397 in
Section 7−3.)
(o) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
This light acts as a reminder to replace
the engine oil.
This light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON” and will go off after
about a few seconds.
When you drive for about 7200 km (4500
miles) after the engine oil replacement,
this light illuminates for about 3 seconds
and then flashes for about 12 seconds
with the ignition key turned to the “ON”
position. If you continue driving without
replacing the engine oil, and if the dis-
tance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000
miles), the light will come on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON” position.
The light will remain on thereafter.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
141
If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early
opportunity depending on the driving and
road conditions. If the light comes on,
replace it as soon as possible.
The system must be reset after the en-
gine oil replacement. Reset the system by
the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position with the odometer reading
shown. (For details, see “Odometer and
two trip meters” on page 131 in this
Section.)
2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-
tion while holding down the trip meter
reset knob.
Hold down the knob for at least 5 sec-
onds. The odometer indicates “000000”
and the light goes off.
If the system fails to reset, the light will
continue flashing.
(p) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove
the key when you open the driver’s door
with the ignition key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
warning light and low windshield
washer fluid level warning light)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the side doors or back
door.
The open door warning light should
come on.
3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.
4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but do
not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators
except the open door warning light
should come on. The “ABS” and “VSC”
warning lights, low tire pressure
warning light and engine oil replace-
ment reminder light go off after a few
seconds. The SRS warning light goes
off after about 6 seconds. (The “TRAC
OFF” indicator light, slip indicator light,
“AIRBAG ON” indicator light and
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light also
come on and go off after a few
seconds.)
If any service reminder indicator or warn-
ing buzzer does not function as described
above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
142
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
143
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1− 7
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
144
“START”—Starter motor on. The key
will return to the “ON” position when
released.
For starting tips, see page 317 in Section
3.
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories
on.
This is the normal driving position.
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position and open the driver’s
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove
the key.
“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be re-
moved only at this position.
You must push in the key to turn it from
“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selec-
tor lever must be in the “P” position be-
fore pushing the key.
Vehicles with engine immobilizer sys-
tem—Once you remove the key, the en-
gine immobilizer system is automatically
set. (See “Engine immobilizer system” on
page 17 in Section 1−2.)
When starting the engine, the key may
seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To
free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine only—
Approximately five hours after the engine
is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from underneath the luggage compartment
for several minutes. This is normal opera-
tion and does not indicate a malfunction.
(See “Leak detection pump” on page ix.)
NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON”
position if the engine is not running.
The battery will discharge and the
ignition could be damaged.
Ignition switch
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
145
Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch in “ON” position and the lock re-
lease button depressed).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking
Automatic transmission
"2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Lock release button
To prevent misshifting
With the brake pedal depressed,
shift while holding the lock release
button in. (The ignition switch must
be in “ON” position.)
Shift while holding the lock
release button in.
Shift normally.
Selector lever
Snow mode
button
Overdrive switch
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
146
(b) Overdrive switch
You can select either third gear (with
overdrive off) or fourth gear (with over-
drive on) by pushing this switch.
To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.
The “O/D OFF” indicator light should come
on. To turn the overdrive on again, push
the switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicator
light should go off.
Always drive your vehicle with the over-
drive on for better fuel economy and
quieter driving.
If the engine is turned off when the over-
drive is off and restarted, the overdrive
will be on automatically.
When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift the transmission by
pushing and releasing the overdrive
switch, engine braking will not be enabled
because the cruise control is not can-
celled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 163 in this
Section.
(c) Normal driving
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 318 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
“P” or “N”.
2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running condi-
tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-
ing, hard towing, etc.
Always turn the overdrive on for better
fuel economy and quieter driving. If the
engine coolant temperature is low, the
transmission will not shift into the over-
drive gear even with the overdrive on.
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelera-
tor pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
(d) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:
D Push the overdrive switch. The “O/D
OFF” indicator light will come on and
the transmission will downshift to third
gear.
D Shift into the “2” position. The trans-
mission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
stronger engine braking will be en-
abled.
Two−wheel drive models
103 km/h (63 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four−wheel drive models
93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
147
D Shift into the “L” position. The trans-
mission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
maximum engine braking will be en-
abled.
Two−wheel drive models
45 km/h (28 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four−wheel drive models
46 km/h (28 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift the transmission by
pushing and releasing the overdrive
switch, engine braking is not enabled be-
cause the cruise control is not cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 163 in this
Section.
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery surface. Abrupt shifting
could cause the vehicle to spin or
skid.
(e) Using “2” and “L” positions
The “2” and “L” positions are used for
strong engine braking as described pre-
viously.
With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, you
can start the vehicle in motion as with the
lever in “D”.
With the selector lever in “2”, the vehicle
will start in first gear and automatically
shift to second gear.
With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-
mission is engaged in first gear.
NOTICE
z Be careful not to over−rev the en-
gine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum al-
lowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:
Two−wheel drive models
“2” 123 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . . . .
“L” 69 km/h (43 mph). . . . . . . . . .
Four−wheel drive models
“2” 111 km/h (69 mph). . . . . . . . .
“L” 62 km/h (38 mph). . . . . . . . . .
z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“2” or “L” position. This may cause
severe automatic transmission dam-
age from overheating. To prevent
such damage, “D” position should
be used in hill climbing or hard
towing.
(f) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the ve-
hicle is moving.
(g) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
148
CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any cir-
cumstances while the vehicle is mov-
ing. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.
(h) Good driving practice
D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between third gear and over-
drive when climbing a gentle slope, the
overdrive switch should be turned off.
Be sure to turn the switch on immedi-
ately afterward.
D When towing a trailer, in order to main-
tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use overdrive.
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
al, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
(i) Driving in snow mode
Use this mode when starting your vehicle
in ice or snow.
To set the driving pattern to the snow
mode, push the switch. The “ECT SNOW”
indicator on the instrument cluster is on.
To cancel the snow mode, push the switch
again.
If the engine is turned off with the snow
mode is on, the snow mode is cancelled
when the engine is restarted.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
149
(j) If you cannot shift the selector le-
ver out of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 354 in Section 4.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
150
Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch in “ON” position and the lock re-
lease button depressed).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
3, 2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking
"3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
Lock release button
To prevent misshifting
With the brake pedal depressed,
shift while holding the lock
release button in.
(The ignition switch must be in
“ON” position.)
Shift while holding the lock
release button in.
Shift normally.
Selector lever
Snow mode
button
Overdrive switch
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
151
(b) Overdrive switch
You can select either fourth gear (with
overdrive off) or fifth gear (with overdrive
on) by pushing this switch.
To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.
The “O/D OFF” indicator light should come
on. To turn the overdrive on again, push
the switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicator
light should go off.
Always drive your vehicle with the over-
drive on for better fuel economy and
quieter driving.
If the engine is turned off when the over-
drive is off and restarted, the overdrive
will be on automatically.
When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift the transmission by
pushing and releasing the overdrive
switch, engine braking will not be enabled
because the cruise control is not can-
celled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 163 in this
Section.
(c) Normal driving
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 318 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
“P” or “N”.
2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running condi-
tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-
ing, hard towing, etc.
Always turn the overdrive on for better
fuel economy and quieter driving. If the
engine coolant temperature is low, the
transmission will not shift into the over-
drive gear even with the overdrive on.
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelera-
tor pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
(d) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:
D Push the overdrive switch. The “O/D
OFF” indicator light will come on and
the transmission will downshift to fourth
gear.
D Shift into the “3” position. The trans-
mission will downshift to third gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 129 km/h (80 mph), and
stronger engine braking will be en-
abled.
D Shift into the “2” position. The trans-
mission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 83 km/h (51 mph), and
stronger engine braking will be en-
abled.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
152
D Shift into the “L” position. The trans-
mission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 39 km/h (24 mph), and
maximum engine braking will be en-
abled.
When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift the transmission by
pushing and releasing the overdrive
switch, engine braking is not enabled be-
cause the cruise control is not cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 163 in this
Section.
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery surface. Abrupt shifting
could cause the vehicle to spin or
skid.
(e) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for
strong engine braking as described pre-
viously.
With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”,
you can start the vehicle in motion as
with the lever in “D”.
With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the
vehicle will start in first gear and automat-
ically shift to third gear or second gear.
With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-
mission is engaged in first gear.
NOTICE
z Be careful not to over−rev the en-
gine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum al-
lowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:
“3” 144 km/h (90 mph). . . . . . . . . . .
“2” 92 km/h (58 mph). . . . . . . . . . . .
“L” 51 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . . . . . .
z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may
cause severe automatic transmis-
sion damage from overheating. To
prevent such damage, “D” position
should be used in hill climbing or
hard towing.
(f) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the ve-
hicle is moving.
(g) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion.
CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any cir-
cumstances while the vehicle is mov-
ing. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
153
(h) Good driving practice
D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between fourth gear and
overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
the overdrive switch should be turned
off. Be sure to turn the switch on im-
mediately afterward.
D When towing a trailer, in order to main-
tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use overdrive.
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
al, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
(i) Driving in snow mode
Use this mode when starting your vehicle
in ice or snow.
To set the driving pattern to the snow
mode, push the switch. The “ECT SNOW”
indicator on the instrument cluster is on.
To cancel the snow mode, push the switch
again.
If the engine is turned off with the snow
mode is on, the snow mode is cancelled
when the engine is restarted.
(j) If you cannot shift the selector le-
ver out of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 354 in Section 4.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
154
The traction control system automatical-
ly helps prevent the spinning of front
wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
the system automatically turns on.
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road condi-
tions, full traction of the vehicle and
power against front wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction
control system is in operation. Do not
drive the vehicle under any speed or
maneuvering conditions which may
cause the vehicle to lose traction
control. In situations where the road
surface is covered with ice or snow,
your vehicle should be fitted with
snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious
speed for the present road condi-
tions.
NORMAL DRIVING MODE
Leave the system on during the ordi-
nary driving so that it can operate
when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the trac-
tion control system is in the self−check
mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is oper-
ating, the following conditions occur:
D The system controls the spinning of the
front wheels. At this time, the slip indi-
cator light blinks.
D You may feel vibration or noise in your
vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.
Traction control system
(two−wheel drive models)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
155
TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE
If your wheels get stuck in an ditch
when you are driving on a severe off
road and sand, turn off the traction
control system. This system that con-
trols engine performance interferes with
the process of freeing your wheels.
To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come
on.
The vehicle stability control system is al-
ways activated, even if the traction control
system is turned off.
To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch
once again.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.
“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on for
a few seconds when the ignition key is
turned to “ON”. It will come on again
when you push the “TRAC OFF” switch to
turn off the system.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
D The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition key is turned “ON”.
D The indicator light remains on after the
ignition is turned on.
D The indicator light comes on with the
normal driving mode while driving.
“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the traction control system
or the vehicle stability control system.
The light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON” and will go off after
a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
system does not work. However, as con-
ventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driv-
ing.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
156
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light comes on while driv-
ing.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come
on when the “VSC” warning light comes
on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not
pushed.
The traction control system automatical-
ly helps prevent the spinning of 4
wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
the system automatically turns on.
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road condi-
tions, full traction of the vehicle and
power against 4 wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction
control system is in operation. Do not
drive the vehicle under any speed or
maneuvering conditions which may
cause the vehicle to lose traction
control. In situations where the road
surface is covered with ice or snow,
your vehicle should be fitted with
snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious
speed for the present road condi-
tions.
NORMAL DRIVING MODE
Leave the system on during the ordi-
nary driving so that it can operate
when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the trac-
tion control system is in the self−check
mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
Traction control system
(four−wheel drive models)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
157
When the traction control system is oper-
ating, the following conditions occur:
D The system controls the spinning of the
4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica-
tor light blinks.
D You may feel vibration or noise in your
vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.
“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the traction control system
or the vehicle stability control system.
The light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON” and will go off after
a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
system does not work. However, as con-
ventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driv-
ing.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light comes on while driv-
ing.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
158
The vehicle stability control system
helps provide comprehensive control of
the systems such as anti−lock brake
system, traction control, engine control,
etc. This system automatically controls
the brakes and engine to help prevent
the vehicle from skidding when corner-
ing on a slippery road surface or oper-
ating steering wheel abruptly.
This system activates when the vehicle
speed is about more than 15 km/h (9
mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the sys-
tem is in the self−check mode, but does
not indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
D Do not rely excessively on the ve-
hicle stability control system. Even
if the system is operating, it cannot
completely eliminate the possibility
of an accident. Always keep safe
driving in mind, as reckless driving
increases the risk of an accident. If
the slip indicator light blinks, spe-
cial care should be taken while
driving.
D Only use tires of specified size. The
size, manufacture, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use the tires other
than specified, or different type or
size, the vehicle stability control
system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 387 in Section 7−2.)
If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-
ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.
Vehicle stability control
system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
159
“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle stability control
system or the traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON” and will go off after
a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
system does not work. However, as con-
ventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driv-
ing.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light comes on while driv-
ing.
Two−wheel drive models only—The “TRAC
OFF” indicator light will come on when the
“VSC” warning light comes on even if the
“TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.
The tire pressure warning system is de-
signed to provide warning when tire
inflation pressure is critically low while
the vehicle is moving. The low tire
pressure warning light comes on to in-
form you that such low tire pressure
may hamper driving.
This system is not designed to operate
when the vehicle is stopped. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
The recommended cold tire inflation pres-
sure, tire size and the vehicle capacity
weight are on the tire and loading informa-
tion label. (For instructions, see “Checking
tire inflation pressure” on page 385 in
Section 7−2.)
Installed tires should be of the specified
size. They should be of the same size
and construction. If tires other than the
specified size are used, or if tires of dif-
ferent sizes or constructions are mixed,
the tire pressure warning system will not
function properly.
Tire pressure warning system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
160
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT
This light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off
after a few seconds. This indicates that
the tire pressure warning system is func-
tioning properly.
If the low tire pressure warning light
comes on or blinks while driving, do
the following.
If the warning light comes on:
1. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the specified level as soon as pos-
sible. (See “Tires” on page 408 in
Section 8.)
2. Push the tire pressure warning sys-
tem reset switch for a few seconds
and make sure the warning light
goes off.
If the light remains on after the reset
switch has been pushed, have the tire
pressure warning system checked at your
Toyota dealer.
If you have a flat tire, replace it with the
spare tire. For details, see “If you have
a flat tire” on page 337 in Section 4.
If the warning light blinks once every
second:
The low tire pressure warning system may
be malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
If the warning light blinks twice every
second:
The low tire pressure warning system
needs to be initialized. Reset the system
with the tire pressure warning system re-
set switch. (To reset the system, see
“TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
RESET SWITCH”.)
The tire pressure warning system does
not function properly under certain cir-
cumstances. In the following cases, the
low tire pressure warning light may not
come on even if the tire inflation pres-
sure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually
normal.
D A compact spare tire, snow tires, or
tire chains are used.
D The tire inflation pressure is excessive-
ly higher than specified, or tire inflation
pressure suddenly drops due to burst-
ing or other causes.
D The vehicle is driven on a slippery
road surface such as rough or frozen
roads.
D The vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h
(19 mph) or more than 100 km/h (62
mph), and the driving duration is less
than 5 minutes.
D The tires differ in tread pattern or
manufacturer.
D The tires are not the specified size.
D The tread wear is very different among
the installed tires.
D Rapid acceleration/deceleration or
sharp turns is continued.
D Towing a trailer.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
161
D The loading is over the limit or imbal-
anced.
D Initialization was not performed correct-
ly after replacing or rotating tires or
wheels.
D The outside temperature is below 0_C
(32_F) or above 40_C (104_F).
CAUTION
When the tire pressure warning light
comes on, observe the following in-
structions:
D Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the specified level as soon as pos-
sible.
D Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu-
vering and braking. If the vehicle
tires deteriorate, you could lose
control of the steering wheel or the
brakes, causing death or serious in-
jury.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring
system on your vehicle will warn you
when one of your tires is significantly
under−inflated and when some com-
binations of your tires are significant-
ly under−inflated. However, there are
other combinations of significantly
under−inflated tires for which your
tire pressure monitoring system may
not warn you. These other combina-
tions are relatively common, account-
ing for approximately half the
instances in which vehicles have sig-
nificantly under−inflated tires. For ex-
ample, your system may not warn you
when both tires on the same side or
on the same axle of your vehicle are
significantly under−inflated. It is par-
ticularly important, therefore, for you
to check the tire pressure in all of
your tires regularly and maintain
proper pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM
RESET SWITCH
The tire pressure warning system need
to be initialized in the following condi-
tions:
D When the low tire pressure warning
light blinks twice every second
D After replacing or rotating tires or
wheels
When initializing the system, the pres-
ent tire condition is stored as a stan-
dard.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
162
To initialize the system, perform the fol-
lowing:
1. Park the vehicle at a safe place and
apply the parking brake. Stop the en-
gine.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed
tires to the specified level. (See “Tires”
on page 408 in Section 8.)
3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.
If the low tire pressure warning light
comes on, push the reset switch for a
few seconds and make sure the warn-
ing light goes off.
4. Push and hold the reset switch until
the low tire pressure warning light
blinks three times.
Initialization is completed after driving at
the speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) or over
for more than one hour. If the following
driving conditions are satisfied, initializa-
tion will be completed in about one hour.
D The vehicle speed is between 50 km/h
(31 mph) and 100 km/h (62 mph).
D The roads are dry, smooth and straight.
D The number of passengers is 1 or 2
(including driver).
When initializing the system, make sure
the low tire pressure warning light blinks
three times. If the warning light does not
blink three times, initializing will be failed
and the tire pressure warning system will
not function properly.
Do not push the reset switch without ad-
justing the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level. Otherwise, the low tire
pressure warning light may not come on
even if the tire pressure is low, or it may
come on when the tire inflation pressure
is actually normal.
If you push the reset switch while the
vehicle is moving, initialization is not per-
formed.
If the low tire pressure warning light does
not blink when you push and hold the
reset switch, have the low pressure warn-
ing system checked at your Toyota dealer.
When the warning light blinks twice every
second while driving, you may be unable
to reset the system. In this case, set the
system again according to the above pro-
cedure.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
163
Type A
Type B
When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.
To set: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal. For better holding power, first de-
press the brake pedal and hold it while
setting the parking brake.
To release: Depress the parking brake
pedal once again.
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.
The buzzer will remind you to release the
parking brake when the vehicle speed
rises above 5 km/h (3 mph) with the park-
ing brake is applied.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the park-
ing brake reminder light is off.
The cruise control is designed to main-
tain a set cruising speed without requir-
ing the driver to operate the accelera-
tor. Cruising speed can be set to any
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).
Within the limits of the engine’s capabili-
ties, cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades. However, changes in ve-
hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.
CAUTION
D To help maintain maximum control
of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-
pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or
winding roads.
D Avoid vehicle speed increases when
driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the
cruise control then downshift the
transmission to use engine braking
to slow down.
Parking brake Cruise control
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
164
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
To turn the cruise control on, press the
“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicator
light on the instrument panel will come on
to indicate that the cruise control is opera-
tional. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button
again turns the system off.
When the system is turned off, cruising
speed must be reset when the cruise con-
trol is turned on again.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging the
cruise control, turn the system off
when it is not in use. Make sure the
“CRUISE” indicator light is off.
SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED
The transmission must be in “D” before
you set the cruising speed.
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-
tion and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-
tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,
or tap it down for a slower speed. Each
tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
165
If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control may be temporarily
cancelled by the driver or by the system
itself under certain circumstances. Tempo-
rary cancellation allows the set cruising
speed to remain in memory.
The cruise control can be temporarily can-
celled by doing the following:
D Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-
rection and releasing it
D Depressing the brake pedal
Under certain circumstances, the cruise
control is temporarily cancelled:
D When vehicle speed falls below 40
km/h (25 mph)
D When vehicle stability control is acti-
vated
When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the set speed, the cruise con-
trol is cancelled and the set speed is
erased from memory.
The “CRUISE” indicator light remains on
to indicate that the system is still in op-
eration.
To turn the cruise control off, press the
“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the
“CRUISE” indicator light is off.
If the cruise control automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-
er at the earliest opportunity.
RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL
If the cruise control is temporarily can-
celled, the cruising speed can be resumed
by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”
direction.
Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25
mph).
RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED
Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
However, a faster way to reset is to ac-
celerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-
tion and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
However, a faster way to reset is to de-
press the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
Even if you turn off the overdrive switch
with the cruise control on, engine braking
will not be applied because the cruise
control is not cancelled. To decrease the
vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed
with the cruise control lever or depress
the brake pedal. If you use the brake
pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
166
CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
If the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes
when using the cruise control, press the
“ON−OFF” button to turn the system off
and then press it again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then oc-
curs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.
D The indicator light does not come on.
D The indicator light flashes again.
D The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
167
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio system
Reference 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your audio system 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat entertainment system 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio/video system operating hints 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the
separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
SECTION 1− 8
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
168
Type 1: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-
pact disc player (with compact disc
changer controller)
Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-
pact disc player with changer
This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your sys-
tem.
Your audio system works when the ignition
key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off.
Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or
“LOAD” to turn on that function without
pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the cas-
sette or compact disc player, a cassette
or compact disc must be loaded in the
player.
You can turn on each player by inserting
a cassette tape or compact disc.
You can turn off each player by ejecting
the cassette tape or compact disc. If the
audio system was previously off, then the
entire audio system will be turned off
when you eject the cassette tape or com-
pact disc. If another function was pre-
viously playing, it will come on again.
SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or
“LOAD” if the system is already on but
you want to switch from one function to
another.
TONE AND BALANCE
For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.
Tone
How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, midrange and bass levels. In
fact, different kinds of music and vocal
programs usually sound better with differ-
ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.
Balance
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the vol-
ume of one group of sounds while de-
creasing the volume of another.
Reference
Using your audio system—
—Some basics
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
169
YOUR RADIO ANTENNA
Your vehicle has the mast type antenna or
on−glass antenna printed on the inside of
the rear quarter window.
Mast type antenna—To remove an anten-
na, carefully turn it counterclockwise.
NOTICE
z Mast type antenna:
To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure it is removed before
driving your Toyota through an au-
tomatic car wash.
z On−glass antenna:
Putting a film (especially a conduc-
tive or metallic film) on the rear
window will noticeably reduce the
sensitivity of the radio.
YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
When you insert a cassette, the exposed
tape should face to the right.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the cassette player. Do not
insert anything other than cassette
tapes into the slot.
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)
When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. The player will play
from track 1 through to the end of the
disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than com-
pact discs into the slot.
8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Your compact disc player does not need
an adaptor to play compact disc singles.
Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3
in.) in diameter−smaller than standard
discs.
After you eject a compact disc single, do
not insert a standard 12 cm (4.7 in.) disc
until “DISC” disappears from the display.
NOTICE
Do not use an adaptor for compact
disc singles—it could cause tracking
errors or interfere with the ejection of
compact discs.
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
CHANGER (type 2)
When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
button and gently push the disc in with
the label side up. This compact disc play-
er can store up to six discs. The player
will play from track 1 through to the end
of the disc. Then it will play from track
1 of the next disc.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
170
NOTICE
z Do not stack up two discs for in-
sertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc changer. Insert
only one compact disc into slot at
a time.
z Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything except a com-
pact disc into the slot.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
171
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.
—Controls and features
"Type 1
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
172
1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the button
until you hear a beep—this will set the
station to the button. The preset button
number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset but-
ton number and station frequency will ap-
pear on the display.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
stations for each button. (The display will
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM” or “FM” button.)
(Eject button)
Push the cassette tape eject button to
eject a cassette. Push the compact disc
eject button to eject a compact disc.
(Program)
Push “
” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“
” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Cassette player
Push “
” (preset button 6) to fast−for-
ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-
ing, push “
” or “TAPE” button. To stop
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.
Compact disc player
Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc play-
er will resume playing.
AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.
AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-
ance adjustment function)
Each time you push the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To
adjust the tone and balance, turn the
knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-
play ranges from −5 to 5.
MID (on some models): Adjusts mid−
pitched tones. The display ranges from −5
to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-
play ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
173
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.
DISC (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc.
When the audio system is set into com-
pact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-
tem—
The “DISC” button may also be used to
operate a DVD player when a disc is
loaded in the DVD player. Pressing the
“DISC” button changes between the CD
player and DVD player. When the DVD
player is in operation, “AUX” appears on
the display.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-
tem will display following error messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-
aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your
Toyota dealer to inspect.
“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Ɲ DISC Ɯ
With compact disc changer only—
Use these buttons to select the disc you
want to listen to.
Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.
Dolbyr
B NR
∗
If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction,
push “
” (preset button 3). “ ” will
appear on the display. Push the button
again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-
tion, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to re-
cord the tape.
∗
: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
FM
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”
will appear on the display. This system
allows you to set twelve FM stations, two
for each of the preset button.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
174
RAND (Random)
There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random fea-
ture, push this button again.
With compact disc changer only—
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will ap-
pear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.
RPT (Repeat)
Cassette player
Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the
track is playing. “
” will appear on
the display. When the track ends, it will
automatically rewind and replay. To turn
off the repeat feature, push this button
again.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the re-
peat feature to work correctly.
Compact disc player
There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole com-
pact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
With compact disc changer only—
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will ap-
pear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.
SCAN
Radio
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-
ton. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
175
Compact disc player
There are two scan features—you can ei-
ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.
Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-
ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display
and the player will scan all the tracks on
the disc you are listening to. To stop
scanning, push this button again. If the
player has scanned all the tracks on the
disc, it will stop scanning.
With compact disc changer only—
Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a
beep. “
·SCAN” will appear on the dis-
play and the player will scan the first
track of the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the player has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-
ning.
SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)
Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.
Cassette player
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.
You can select up to nine recordings (in-
cluding current one).
A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When the beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.
Compact disc player
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the begin-
ning of the current track, quickly push the
down side of the button one time.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-
tem—
While the DVD player is in operation, the
chapter or track can be changed by push-
ing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is re-
ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prev-
ent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
tion.
TAPE
Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
tape.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
176
TEXT
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the com-
pact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.
TUNE (Tuning)
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-
clockwise to step down the frequency.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
177
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.
"Type 2
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
178
1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the button
until you hear a beep—this will set the
station to the button. The preset button
number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset but-
ton number and station frequency will ap-
pear on the display.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
for each button. (The display will show
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you push
“AM” or “FM” button.)
(Eject button)
Cassette player
This button is used to eject a cassette.
Compact disc player
This button is used to eject one or all
compact discs.
To eject the current compact disc, push
and release the compact disc eject button.
To eject a specific disc, push “Ɲ” (preset
button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset button 4) until the
number of the disc you want to eject is
displayed. Push and release the eject but-
ton.
To eject all discs at a time, press and
hold the eject button until you hear a
beep. The last compact disc played before
pushing the button will be ejected first. If
the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.
(Program)
Push “
” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“
” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Cassette player
Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast−for-
ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-
ing, push “
” or “TAPE” button. To stop
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.
Compact disc player
Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc play-
er will resume playing.
AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
179
AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-
ance adjustment function)
Each time you push the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To
adjust the tone and balance, turn the
knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-
play ranges from −5 to 5.
MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-
play ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-
play ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.
DISC (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc.
When the audio system is set into com-
pact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-
tem—
The “DISC” button may also be used to
operate a DVD player when a disc is
loaded in the DVD player. Pressing the
“DISC” button changes between the CD
player and DVD player. When the DVD
player is in operation, “AUX” appears on
the display.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-
tem will display following error messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-
aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your
Toyota dealer to inspect.
“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Ɲ DISC Ɯ
Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.
Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen to appears on the display.
Dolbyr
B NR
∗
If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction,
push “
” (preset button 3). “ ” will
appear on the display. Push the button
again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-
tion, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to re-
cord the tape.
∗
: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
FM
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”
will appear on the display. This system
allows you to set twelve FM, two for each
of the preset button.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
180
LOAD
This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.
To load one compact disc only, quickly
push and release the button, then insert
a compact disc. After the disc is loaded,
the shutter of the slot will close.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold the button (until you hear a beep
when the audio system is on), then insert
the first compact disc. After the disc is
loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.
After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-
matically open again so the next disc can
be inserted. The same process can be
applied for loading the rest of the discs.
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”
will appear on the display.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.
RAND (Random)
There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random fea-
ture, push this button again.
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will ap-
pear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.
RDS (Radio Data System) display
The radio will automatically switch to the
RDS mode to receive an RDS station
while tuned to FM broadcasts. “RDS” will
appear on the display.
RPT (Repeat)
Cassette player
Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the
track is playing. “
” will appear on
the display. When the track ends, it will
automatically rewind and replay. To turn
off the repeat feature, push this button
again.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the re-
peat feature to work correctly.
Compact disc player
There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole com-
pact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
181
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will ap-
pear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.
SCAN
Radio
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-
ton. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.
Compact disc player
There are two scan features—you can ei-
ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.
Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-
ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display
and the player will scan all the tracks on
the disc you are listening to. To stop
scanning, push this button again. If the
player has scanned all the tracks on the
disc, it will stop scanning.
Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a
beep. “
·SCAN” will appear on the dis-
play and the player will scan the first
track of the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the player has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-
ning.
SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)
Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.
Cassette player
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.
You can select up to nine recordings (in-
cluding current one).
A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When the beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
182
Compact disc player
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the begin-
ning of the current track, quickly push the
down side of the button one time.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-
tem—
While the DVD player is in operation, the
chapter or track can be changed by push-
ing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is re-
ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prev-
ent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
tion.
TAPE
Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
tape.
TEXT
Radio
This button is operational only in RDS
mode.
When an RDS station transmits a text
message, “MSG” will appear on the dis-
played.
To display the text message, first push
the “TEXT” button to change the radio
station display. Then push the “TEXT” but-
ton once more to display, and the mes-
sage will appear on the display.
If the entire the message is not displayed,
“
” will appear on the display. To display
the rest of the message, push and hold
the “TEXT” button until you hear a beep.
After the entire message has been dis-
played, the message will disappear.
The message display will be canceled if
any button that affects the display is
pushed.
If no messages are received, “NO
MESSAGE” will appear on the display, and
the display returns to the previous mode.
The message display will be canceled if
you activate any function that affects the
display.
Compact disc player
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the com-
pact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.
TRAF (Traffic)
This button turns the traffic announcement
(TA) feature on and off. This button is
operational only in FM mode.
By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAF
SEEK” will flash on the display and the
radio will seek a traffic program station.
After the traffic announcement program is
over, the display returns to the previous
mode.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
183
If no traffic program station is found, “NO
TRAFINFO” appears on the display, and
the display returns to the previous mode
and a beep sounds.
To cancel the traffic announcement, push
this button again.
TUNE (Tuning)
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counter-
clockwise to step down the frequency.
TYPE (Program Types)
When you push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” of the “TYPE”
button while receiving an RDS station, the
current program type will appear on the
display. If the system is receiving a sta-
tion that is not RDS, “NO PTY” will ap-
pear.
Repeat this operation within 6 seconds to
display the program types in the following
order:
D ROCK
D EASY LIS (Easy listening)
D CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
D R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
D INFORM (Information)
D RELIGION
D MISC (Miscellaneous)
D ALERT (Emergency message)
To seek or scan for the same type of
program, push the “SEEK/TRACK” or
“SCAN” button while the program type is
displayed.
If no program is found, “NOTHING” will
appear on the display. The previous pro-
gram information will resume.
When the system is left untouched for 6
seconds, the program type display will
change to the frequency display.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
184
Some parts of the audio system can be
adjusted using the switches on the steer-
ing wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. “+
−” switch
2. “ƜƝ” switch
3. “MODE” switch
Audio remote controls (steering switches)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
185
1. “+ −” switch
Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol-
ume continues to increase while the
switch is being pushed.
Push “−” to decrease the volume. The
volume continues to decrease while the
switch is being pushed.
2. “ƜƝ” switch
Radio
This switch has the following features—
To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch. Do this again to select
the next preset station.
To seek a station:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Do this
again to find the next station. If you push
the switch on either side during the seek
mode, seeking will be cancelled.
To step up or down the frequency, push
and hold the switch even after you hear
a beep. When you release from the
switch, the radio will begin seeking up or
down for a station. Do this again to find
the next station.
Cassette player
This switch has the following features—
To skip to a different track in either direc-
tion:
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will
appear on the display.
Next, push either side of the track switch
until the track you want to listen to is set.
If you push the switch ten times, the skip
function will turn off. (You can skip up to
nine tracks at a time.)
When counting the number of the tracks
you want to rewind, remember to count
the current track as well. For example, if
you want to rewind to a song that is two
tracks before the song you are listening
to, push the “Ɲ” side of the switch three
times.
If you push the track switch further than
you wanted to, push the other side of the
switch. The track number will be in-
creased or reduced.
The track number you select is not valid
if it is higher than the number of the
tracks remaining on the current side of
the cassette.
D When the tape reaches to the begin-
ning, the player will automatically start
playing that side.
D After the tape reaches to the end, the
player will automatically reverse and
start playing the other side.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks for the track switch
to work correctly. In addition, the feature
may not work well with some spoken, live,
or classical recordings.
To fast forward or reverse:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” side of the switch
to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” will
appear on the display. Push and hold the
“Ɲ” side of the switch to rewind a tape.
“REW” will appear on the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast forward-
ing, push the “Ɯ” side of the switch. To
stop the tape while it is rewinding, push
the “Ɲ” side of the switch.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
186
Compact disc player
Use this switch to skip up or down to a
different track in either direction.
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch until the track you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current track, push
the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.
With compact disc changer only—
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until the disc you want to listen to
is set.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-
tem—
While the DVD player is in operation, the
chapter or track can be changed by push-
ing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the switch.
3. “MODE” switch
Push “MODE” switch to select an audio
mode. Each push changes the mode se-
quentially if the desired mode is ready to
use. The DVD player will be selectable if
a rear seat entertainment system is
installed in your vehicle.
To turn the audio system on, push the
“MODE” switch.
To turn the audio system off, push and
hold the “MODE” switch until the system
turns off.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
187
The rear seat entertainment system con-
sists of the following components.
1. Headphone volume control dials
2. Headphone jacks
3. DVD player
4. Rear seat entertainment system display
5. Rear seat entertainment system
controller
6. A/V input adapter
7. Power outlet
8. Power outlet main switch
9. Front audio system
Rear seat entertainment system—
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
188
The rear seat entertainment system is de-
signed for the rear passengers to enjoy
audio and DVD video separately from the
front audio system.
The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated when the ignition key is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The rear passengers can enjoy all modes
(AM and FM radio, cassette tape player,
compact disc player with changer and
DVD player) on the rear seat entertain-
ment system only if a cassette tape and
a compact disc are loaded in the front
audio system.
The rear seat entertainment system can
play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD
text, dts−CD or DVD audio only when a
disc is loaded in the DVD player.
You can enjoy videos and sound when
your personal audio system is connected
to the input terminal adapter on the rear
console box. For details, refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment
system with commercial headphone. See
“—Headphone jacks” on page 237 in this
Section for details.
You can also enjoy the rear seat enter-
tainment system with a wireless head-
phone. The wireless headphone can be
used within rear seat. If the signal be-
comes weak, the headphone will mute.
For details, refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
With some wireless headphone generally
available in the market, it may be difficult
to catch sound properly. Toyota recom-
mends the use of Toyota genuine wireless
headphone.
You can purchase a wireless headphone
at a Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
D Do not operate a motor vehicle
while using headphones. Doing so
may cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
D Conversational speech on some
DVDs is recorded at a low volume
to emphasize the impact of sound
effects. If you adjust the volume
assuming that the conversations
represent the maximum volume lev-
el that the DVD will play, you may
be startled by louder sound effects
or when you change to a different
audio source. Be sure to adjust the
volume with this in mind.
Make sure the volume is not in-
creased, before you turn on the
headphone.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
189
To open the display, push the lock release
button.
Push down the display until it is locked.
NOTICE
The screen should be cleaned with a
dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed
by hand or wiped with a hard cloth,
the surface of the screen may be
scratched.
To close, push up the display until you
hear a click.
The illumination of the screen is automati-
cally turned off when the display is
closed. However, the rear seat entertain-
ment system is not turned off.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, close the display when
it is not in use.
—Display
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
190
NOTICE
z Benzene or alkaline solutions may
damage the coated surface of the
screen.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not turn on the rear
seat entertainment system longer
than necessary when the engine is
not running.
The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated with the rear seat entertain-
ment system controller and buttons on the
DVD player unit. The system cannot be
operated by touching the switches on the
screen directly.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the
controller. It may cause an accident,
fire or electric shock.
NOTICE
Keep the controller away from direct
sunlight, high heat and high humidity.
These conditions could cause the
case to deform or the battery to ex-
plode or leak.
BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER
(for new vehicle owners)
A battery is already set in the control-
ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-
vents the battery from being dis-
charged. Before using the controller,
remove the insulating sheet according
to the following procedure.
—Rear seat entertainment
system controller
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
191
1. Remove the cover of the controller
as shown.
2. Remove the insulating sheet.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
192
USING THE CONTROLLER
To use the rear seat entertainment sys-
tem controller, direct the signal output
portion of the controller to the signal
reception portion of the rear seat enter-
tainment system display.
The controller does not operate properly
when the signal reception portion of the
display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, stow the controller in
the console box or front seatback
pocket when it is not in use.
NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the
controller may be damaged.
z Do not drop or strongly knock the
controller against hard objects.
z Do not sit on or place heavy ob-
jects on the controller.
z Do not leave the controller exposed
to high temperatures (such as on
the instrument panel) for a long
time.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
193
LOCATING THE CONTROLLER
If you lose sight of the controller, push
and hold the “CURSOR (REMOTE)” button
on the DVD player unit until you hear a
beep. A buzzer sounds from the controller
to let you know where it is.
To stop the buzzer, push any button of the
controller.
If the controller is located close to some-
thing that blocks the signal, such as some
kind of metal, the controller may not re-
ceive the signal and the buzzer may not
sound.
FCC Information
Caution: Any changes or modifica-
tions in construction of this device
which are not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
FCC Label Information
This device complies with part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, In-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
194
1. “DVD” button
This button turns on the DVD mode.
2. “SOURCE” button
This button turns on the rear seat en-
tertainment system and selects the
mode.
3. “OFF” button
This button turns off the rear seat en-
tertainment system.
4. Joystick
This joystick selects a control switch,
mode switch on the screen or the
menu for the disc.
5. “ENT” button
This button inputs the selected switch
or the selected menu for the disc.
6. “DISC/CH/PROG” button
This button skips directly to a desired
preset station, disc, track or chapter.
7. “""” button
This button fast forwards a screen
when the DVD player is operated.
8. “RETURN” button
This button skips to the predetermined
scene for the disc when the DVD play-
er is operated.
—Control buttons
"Controller
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
195
9. “MENU” button
This button indicates the menu screen
for DVD video when the DVD player is
operated.
10. “AUDIO” button
This button indicates the changing au-
dio screen when the DVD player is
operated.
11. “SUB TITLE” button
This button indicates the changing sub-
title screen when the DVD player is
operated.
12. “DISPLAY” button
This button adjusts the color, tone,
contrast and brightness of the screen.
13. “SET UP” button
This button indicates the initial set up
screen when the DVD player is oper-
ated.
14. “ANGLE” button
This button selects the angle of the
screen when the DVD player is oper-
ated.
15. “SEARCH” button
This button indicates the title search
screen when the DVD player is oper-
ated.
16. “TOP MENU” button
This button indicates the title selection
screen for DVD video when the DVD
player is operated.
17. “
” button
This button pauses a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
18. “AA” button
This button reverses a screen when
the DVD player is operated.
19. “"” button
This button plays a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
20. “TUNE/TRACK” button
This button seeks a radio station or
selects track/chapter.
21. “CURSOR” button
This button indicates the control
switches on the screen when the DVD
player is operated.
22. “VIDEO” button
This button causes the display to use
the video signal from an external video
device.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
196
1. “ ” button
This button ejects a disc.
2. “SOURCE” button
This button turns on the rear seat en-
tertainment system and selects the
mode.
3. “TUNE/TRACK” button
This button seeks a radio station or
selects track/chapter.
4. “DISC/CH/PROG” button
This button skips directly to a desired
preset station, disc, track or chapter.
5. “CURSOR (REMOTE)” button
This button indicates the control
switches on the screen when the DVD
player is operated. This button also
can be used when you lose sight of
the controller.
6. Joystick
This joystick selects a control switch,
mode switch on the screen or the
menu for the disc.
"Buttons on the DVD player unit
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
197
7. “ENT” button
This button inputs the selected switch
or the selected menu for the disc.
8. “DISC” indicator light
This light indicates that the disc is
loaded.
Controller
DVD player unit
To turn on the system, push the
“SOURCE” button.
The screen indicates which mode can be
selected. Push the “DVD” or “VIDEO” but-
ton when the connected DVD player or
your personal audio machine is on. The
rear seat entertainment system will be
turned on.
The rear seat entertainment system can
select all the modes.
When a cassette tape, a compact disc, a
DVD video disc, an audio CD, a video
CD, a CD text, a dts−CD or a DVD audio
disc is not loaded on the front audio sys-
tem or the DVD player, only the radio
mode can be selected on the rear seat
entertainment system.
—Turning the rear seat
entertainment system on and
off
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
198
To turn off the system, push the “OFF”
button.
When the front audio system is turned off,
the rear audio system and the DVD player
will be turned off simultaneously.
All the modes of the front audio system
can be operated on the rear seat enter-
tainment system.
When the same mode is selected on the
front and rear audio systems simulta-
neously, the system can be operated on
the front audio system.
If the radio mode is selected on the front
and rear audio systems at the same time,
AM and FM modes cannot be changed on
the rear seat audio system.
Controller
DVD player unit
—Front audio system
operation
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
199
SELECTING THE MODE
Use the joystick to select the mode. Push
the “ENT” button to enter the mode.
The mode display which is selected by
the joystick is colored blue. When the
“ENT” button is pushed, the mode display
changes to green. If the mode display is
gray, it cannot be selected.
The “Speaker sound” on the mode display
is selected on the front audio system.
Radio
Cassette tape player and compact disc
player
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
200
When you select a mode, the screen indi-
cates which is selected.
Radio
AM mode:
When you select the AM mode, “AM” will
appear on the screen.
FM mode:
When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or
“FM2” will appear on the screen.
Tape mode
“TAPE” appears on the screen while this
mode is selected.
Compact disc mode
“CD” appears on the screen while this
mode is selected.
The screen shows the track, or track and
disc number currently being played.
Controller
DVD player unit
OPERATING FRONT AUDIO SYSTEM
To operate the front audio system, use
the following switches.
1. “DISC/CH/PROG” button
Radio
You can scan only the preset stations for
the band of the front audio system. (For
instructions, see “—Controls and features”
on page 171 in this Section.)
To scan the preset stations:
Push the “
” or “ ” side of the “DISC/
CH/PROG” button. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up or down the
band. The station frequency will appear on
the screen.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
201
Cassette tape player
Push the “
” or “ ” side of the “DISC/
CH/PROG” button to select the other side
of a cassette tape. The screen indicates
which side is currently selected. (“
” indi-
cates the top side, “
” indicates the bot-
tom side.)
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
Compact disc player with changer
Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.
Push the “
” or “ ” side of the “DISC/
CH/PROG” button until the number of the
disc you want to listen appears on the
display.
2. “TUNE/TRACK” button
Radio
Push the “
” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/
TRACK” button to tune or seek.
Tuning:
Quickly push and release the “
” or “ ”
side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button. Each
time you push the button, the radio will
step up or down to another frequency. If
you push and hold the button, and the
radio will go into the seek mode.
Seeking:
Push and hold the “
” or “ ” side of the
“TUNE/TRACK” button. The radio will seek
up or down for a station of the nearest
frequency and will stop on reception. Each
time you push the button, the stations will
be searched one after another.
Cassette tape player
To fast forward a cassette tape, push and
hold the “
” side of the “TUNE/TRACK”
button until “FF” appears on the screen.
Push and hold the “
” side of the “TUNE/
TRACK” button until “REW” appears on
the screen to rewind a tape.
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.
You can select up to nine recordings (in-
cluding current one).
Push the “
” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/
TRACK” button. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will
appear on the screen.
Next, push either side of the track button
until the number on the screen reaches
the number of tracks you want to skip. If
you push the button 10 times, the skip
feature will be turned off.
For the skip feature to work correctly a
blank space of at least 3 seconds is con-
sidered to be a start of a recording.
When a beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken, live, or classical re-
cordings.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
202
Compact disc player
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
Push the “
” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
screen. If you want to return to the begin-
ning of the current track, quickly push the
“
” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button one
time.
Push and hold the “
” or “ ” side of the
“TUNE/TRACK” button to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc play-
er will resume playing.
REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY
For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to pre-
vent small children from swallowing
the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be care-
ful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by a Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used batteries according
to local regulations.
Replace the battery according to the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Remove the cover of the controller as
shown.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
203
2. Remove the discharged batteries and
put in the new batteries as shown.
Install the cover.
NOTICE
z Be sure that the positive side and
negative side of the controller bat-
tery should be faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause rust.
z Do not touch or move any compo-
nents inside of the controller, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
of the controller battery insertion.
z Close the battery case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
controller operates properly. If the control-
ler still does not operate properly, contact
your Toyota dealer.
The DVD player can play audio CDs,
DVD video discs, CD texts, dts−CDs
and video CDs.
For appropriate discs for this player, see
“Audio/video system operating hints” on
page 238 in this Section.
The DVD player works when the ignition
key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
To turn on the DVD player, a disc must
be loaded in the player.
To turn off the player, eject the disc.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-
tem will display following error messages.
If “DISC CHECK” appears on the
screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,
damaged or it was inserted upside down.
Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on
the screen: It indicates that the DVD re-
gion code is not set properly.
If “DVD ERROR” appears on the
screen: There is a problem inside the
player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
—DVD player
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
204
INSERTING THE DISC
Insert the compact disc into the slot
with the label side up.
“DISC” indicator light turns on while the
disc is loaded.
If the label faces down, the disc cannot
be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”
and disc number appear on the screen.
If a disc which is not playable is inserted,
“DISC CHECK” will also appear on the
screen. For appropriate discs for this play-
er, see “Audio/video system operating
hints” on page 238 in this Section.
The player will play the track or chapter,
and it will play from the beginning of the
track or chapter again after it reaches the
end.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the DVD player. Do not insert
anything other than a disc into the
slot.
8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Your compact disc player does not need
an adaptor to play compact disc singles.
Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3
in.) in diameter−smaller than standard
discs.
NOTICE
Do not use an adaptor for compact
disc singles—it could cause tracking
errors or interfere with the ejection of
compact discs.
EJECTING THE DISC
Push the “ ” button.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
205
To select the DVD mode, push the
“DVD” button on the controller.
You can also select the DVD mode on the
mode selection screen mentioned above.
The “DVD Hint!” screen appears when
the DVD mode is first selected after
you turn the ignition key to the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Push the “OK” switch when you read the
message.
—Selecting the DVD mode
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
206
The DVD player can be operated with the
controller buttons directly.
1. “DVD” button
2. “RETURN” button
3. “MENU” button
4. “AUDIO” button
5. “SUB TITLE” button
6. “ANGLE” button
7. “SET UP” button
8. “SEARCH” button
9. “TOP MENU” button
10. “
”, “"”, “AA” and “""” buttons
Controller
DVD player unit
The player can also be operated with the
switches on the screen.
To operate the switches on the screen,
select the switch by the joystick and push
the “ENT” button. You cannot select the
switches on the screen by touching them
directly.
When the switch is selected by the joys-
tick, the outline of the switch changes to
blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the
switch will be highlighted in green.
—DVD player operation
switches
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
207
Controller
DVD player unit
TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES
ON AND OFF
To turn on the operation switches, push
the “CURSOR” button on the controller.
Page 1 (DVD video operation switch)
Page 2 (DVD video operation switch)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
208
Page 1 (DVD audio operation switch)
Page 2 (DVD audio operation switch)
Page 1 (video CD)
Page 2 (video CD)
There are operation switches on the
“Page1” and “Page2” screens.
To change the screen, push the “Page1”
or “Page2” switch on the screen.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
209
If “ ” appears on the screen when
you select a switch, it indicates that
the switch cannot work.
On the screen
Controller
DVD player unit
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
210
To turn off the switches on the screen,
push the “CURSOR” button on the control-
ler once again or push the “Hide Buttons”
on the screen.
NOTE: The playback condition of some
DVD video discs may be determined by
the DVD video software producer. This
DVD player plays discs as the software
producer intended. Therefore, some
functions may not work properly. Be
sure to read the instruction manual for
the DVD video disc separately provided.
For detailed information about DVD vid-
eo discs, see “—DVD video disc infor-
mation” on page 234 in this Section.
Precautions for DVD video discs
When recording on a DVD video, DVD
audio, video CD or audio tracks may not
record in some cases while the menu is
displayed. As audio will not play in this
case, verify that the video tracks are play-
ing and then activate playback.
The title/chapter number and playback
time display may not appear while playing
back certain DVD video discs.
CAUTION
Conversational speech on some DVDs
is recorded at a low volume to em-
phasize the impact of sound effects.
If you adjust the volume assuming
that the conversations represent the
maximum volume level available for
the DVD, you may be startled by
louder sound effects or when you
change to a different audio source.
Loud sounds may have a significant
impact on the human body or pose a
driving hazard. Keep this in mind
when you adjust the volume.
—DVD player operation
(DVD video/DVD audio)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
211
DVD video
DVD audio
TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE
DISC ON OR OFF
DVD video—
To turn on the menu screen for the disc,
push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch
on the screen. You can also turn on the
menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or
“TOP MENU” switch on the controller.
DVD audio—
To turn on the menu screen for the disc,
push the “Top Menu” switch on the
screen. You can also turn on the menu
screen by pushing the “TOP MENU”
switch on the controller.
For the operation of the menu screen, see
the separate manual for the DVD disc.
To turn on the selecting switch, push the
“
” switch.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
212
To select the menu for the disc, push the
“
”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” switches on the
screen. Push the “Enter” switch to select
the menu for the disc.
You can also select the menu for the disc
by the joystick and the “ENT” button on
the controller when the control switches
are not indicated on the screen.
Push the “Move Buttons” on the screen,
and the switches (“
”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”,
“Enter” and “Move Buttons” switches) will
move up and down.
To turn off the switch, push the “OFF”
switch on the screen. To turn on the
switch again, push the “ON” switch on the
screen.
To return to the previous screen, push the
“Back” switch on the screen.
DVD video
DVD audio
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
213
OPERATING THE “ ”, “"”, “AA” AND
“""” SWITCHES/BUTTONS
“
” switch/button: Push this switch/button
to pause the disc.
“"” switch/button: Push this switch/button
to cancel the pause and return to normal
playing.
“AA” and “""” switches/buttons: Push
and hold the “AA” or “""” switch/button
to fast forward or reverse. When you re-
lease the switch/button, the DVD player
will resume playing.
DVD video only—
Push the “AA” or “""” switch/button
while pausing, the DVD video plays the
slow−motion video replay or the slow−mo-
tion video replay in reverse.
DVD video
DVD audio
SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINED
SCREEN
To skip to the predetermined screen, push
the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts
playing from the beginning of the predeter-
mined screen. You can also display the
screen by pushing the “RETURN” button
on the controller.
For further details of the predetermined
screen, see the separate manual for the
DVD disc.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
214
DVD video
DVD audio
SELECTING THE TITLE/GROUP
To display the searching title (DVD video)
or group (DVD audio) screen, push the
“Search” switch on the screen. You can
also display the screen by pushing the
“SEARCH” button on the controller.
DVD video
DVD audio
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
215
DVD video—
Select the title number by using the “−”,
“+” and “+10” switches and push the
“Enter” switch to enter the number. The
player starts playing disc for that title
number. The selected title number will
appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.
DVD audio—
Enter the group number by using the “−”
and “+” switches. The selected group
number will appear on the screen. Push
the “Enter” switch. The player starts play-
ing the disc from the entered group num-
ber.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
SELECTING THE BONUS GROUP
DVD audio only—
Enter the bonus group number on the
searching group screen and push the
“Enter” switch. The “Enter Key Code”
screen will appear. To enter the number of
the group you want to play, push the
group number. If you enter the wrong
number, push the “Clear” switch to delete
the number.
Push the “Enter” switch on the screen.
The player starts playing the disc from the
selected bonus group number.
CHANGING THE STILL PICTURE
DVD audio only—
Push the “Still Prev.” or “Still Next” switch
on the screen to forward or reverse the
still pictures.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
216
DVD video
DVD audio
CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,
and then the changing subtitle language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”
button on the controller.
Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,
another language stored on the disc is
selected.
To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide”
switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
The selected subtitle language will appear
on the screen.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
217
CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE (DVD
video only)
Push the “Audio” switch on the screen
and then the changing audio language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button
on the controller.
Each time you push the “Audio” switch,
another language stored on the disc is
selected.
The selected audio language will appear
on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
218
CHANGING AUDIO FORMAT (DVD audio
only)
Push the “Audio” switch on the screen or
the “AUDIO” button on the controller and
the changing audio format screen will ap-
pear.
Each time you push the “Audio” switch,
another audio format stored on the disc is
selected.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
219
DVD video
DVD audio
CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN
Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,
and then the changing angle screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the
controller.
The angle can be selected for discs that
are multi−angle compatible when the
“ ” mark appears on the screen. Each
time you push the “Angle” switch, the
angle changes. The angle number which
you can select will appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
220
DVD video
DVD audio
CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING
Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,
and then the initial setting screen will ap-
pear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-
troller. You can change the initial setting.
After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.
Setup Menu 1 screen
Setup Menu 2 screen
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
221
There are initial setting switches on the
“Setup Menu 1” and “Setup Menu 2”
screens.
To change the screen, push the “Page1”
or “Page2” switch on the screen.
After you change the initial setting, push
the “Enter” switch. The initial setting
switch will be turned off and return to the
picture previously.
When the “Default” switch on “Setup Menu
2” is pushed, all menus are initialized.
CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE
Push the “Audio Language” switch on the
“Setup Menu 1” and the “Select Audio
Language” screen appears.
Select the language you want to hear on
the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to
hear, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
Audio Lang. Code” screen will appear.
To enter the code of the language you
want to hear, push the number of the
language code. For details about the lan-
guage codes, see the language code list.
If you enter a wrong number, push the
“Clear” switch to delete the number.
If numbers which are not on the list are
entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,
the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear.
Push the language code you want to hear
again.
To return to the “Select Audio Language”
screen, push the “Back” switch.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
222
CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”,
push the “Subtitle Language” switch on
the “Setup Menu 1” screen.
Select the language you want to read on
the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to
read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will appear.
To enter the code of the language you
want to read, push the number of the
language code. For details about the lan-
guage codes, see the language code list.
If you enter a wrong number, push the
“Clear” switch to delete the number.
Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. If
numbers which are not on the list are
entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,
the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.
Push the language code you want to read
again.
To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.
CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE
To display the “Select DVD Language”
screen, push the “DVD Language” switch
on the “Setup Menu 1” screen.
Select the language you want to read on
the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to
read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
DVD Language Code” screen will appear.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
223
To enter the code of the language you
want to read, push the number of the
language code. For details about the lan-
guage codes, see the language code list.
If you enter a wrong number, push the
“Clear” switch to delete the number.
Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. If
numbers which are not on the list are
entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,
the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.
Push the language code you want to read
again.
To return to the “Select DVD Language”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.
TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR
OFF
The angle mark can be turned on for
discs that are multi−angle compatible.
Each time you push the “Angle Mark”
switch on the screen, the angle mark
turns on or off alternately.
SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWER
RESTRICTIONS
You can restrict the play back screen by
setting the viewer restrictions. You can
prevent the restriction with a password.
Some discs do not supply a restriction.
To set the level of viewer restriction, push
the “Parental Lock” switch on the “Setup
Menu 1” screen. The “Enter Personal
Code” screen will appear.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
224
Push the number for the password and
the “Enter” switch. The “Select Restriction
Level” screen will appear.
If you enter a wrong number, push the
“Clear” switch to delete the number.
You cannot change the setting without in-
putting the password. When you forget or
change the password, push the “Clear”
switch ten times to initialize the password.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller
the level number, the stricter the age limit.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
“Setup Menu 1” screen.
SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE
Each time you push the “Display Mode”
switch on the “Setup Menu 2” screen, the
display mode is changed from wide mode
to auto mode.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
225
LANGUAGE CODE LIST
Code
Language
1001 Japanese
0514 English
0618 French
0405 German
0920 Italian
0519 Spanish
2608 Chinese
1412 Dutch
1620 Portuguese
1922 Swedish
1821 Russian
1115 Korean
0512 Greek
0101 Afar
0102 Abkhazian
0106 Afrikaans
0113 Amharic
0118 Arabic
0119 Assamese
0125 Aymara
0126 Azerbaijani
0201 Bashkir
0205 Byelorussian
0207 Bulgarian
0208 Bihari
0209 Bislama
0214 Bengali
0215 Tibetan
0218 Breton
0301 Catalan
0315 Corsican
0319 Czech
0325 Welsh
0401 Danish
0426 Bhutani
0515 Esperanto
0520 Estonian
0521 Basque
0601 Persian
0609 Finnish
0610 Fiji
0615 Faroese
0625 Frisian
0701 Irish
0704 Scots−Gaelic
0712 Galician
0714 Guarani
0721 Gujarati
0801 Hausa
0809 Hindi
0818 Croatian
0821 Hungarian
0825 Armenian
0901 Interlingua
0905 Interlingue
0911 Inupiak
0914 Indonesian
0919 Icelandic
0923 Hebrew
1009 Yiddish
1023 Javanese
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
226
1101 Georgian
1111 Kazakh
1112 Greenlandic
1113 Cambodian
1114 Kannada
1119 Kashmiri
1121 Kurdish
1125 Kirghiz
1201 Latin
1214 Lingala
1215 Laothian
1220 Lithuanian
1222 Latvian
1307 Malagasy
1309 Maori
1311 Macedonian
1312 Malayalam
1314 Mongolian
1315 Moldavian
1318 Marathi
1319 Malay
1320 Maltese
1325 Burmese
1401 Nauru
1405 Nepali
1415 Norwegian
1503 Occitan
1513 (Afan) Oromo
1518 Oriya
1601 Punjabi
1612 Polish
1619 Pashto, Pushto
1721 Quechua
1813 Rhaeto−Romance
1814 Kirundi
1815 Romanian
1823 Kinyarwanda
1901 Sanskrit
1904 Sindhi
1907 Sangho
1908 Serbo−Croatian
1909 Sinhalese
1911 Slovak
1912 Slovenian
1913 Samoan
1914 Shona
1915 Somali
1917 Albanian
1918 Serbian
1919 Siswati
1920 Sesotho
1921 Sundanese
1923 Swahili
2001 Tami l
2005 Telugu
2007 Tajik
2008 Thai
2009 Tigrinya
2011 Turkmen
2012 Tagalog
2014 Setswana
2015 Tonga
2018 Turkish
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
227
2019 Tsonga
2020 Tat ar
2023 Twi
2111 Ukrainian
2118 Urdu
2126 Uzbek
2209 Vietnamese
2215 Volapük
2315 Wolof
2408 Xhosa
2515 Yoruba
2621 Zulu
SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK
To select the chapter/track, push the “
”
or “
” side of the (TUNE/TRACK) button
on the controller until the number of the
chapter/track you want to select appears
on the screen.
DVD video
DVD audio
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
228
USING THE CONTROL SCREEN
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-
ton on the controller. The control screen
will appear on the screen.
Details of the specific switches, controls
and features are described below.
1. “PICTURE” switch
Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn off
the control screen and return to the
picture previously displayed.
2. “RPT” switch (DVD audio only)
Push the “RPT” switch while the track
is playing. When the track ends, it will
automatically replay. To turn off the re-
peat feature, push this switch again.
3. “RAND” switch (DVD audio only)
Push the “RAND” switch. The player
will play the tracks on the disc in ran-
dom order. To turn off the random fea-
ture, push this switch again.
4. “SCAN” switch (DVD audio only)
Push the “SCAN” switch. The player
will scan all the tracks on the disc you
are listening to. To stop scanning, push
this switch again. If the player has
scanned all the tracks on the disc, it
will stop scanning.
5. “
” and “ ” switches
Push and hold the “
” or “ ” switch
to fast forward or reverse a disc. When
you release the switch, the DVD player
will resume playing.
SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER
(video CD only)
Push the “Sel. Number” switch and then
the disc menu number search screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “SEARCH” switch on the
controller.
—DVD player operation (video
CD/audio CD/CD text)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
229
Enter the disc menu number by using the
“−”, “+” and “+10” switches and push the
“Enter” switch. The player starts playing
the disc from the entered disc menu num-
ber. The entered disc menu number will
appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.
Move up and down the switches by push-
ing the “Move Buttons” on the screen.
OPERATING THE “ ”, “"”, “AA” AND
“""” SWITCHES
“
” switch: Push this switch to pause the
disc.
“"” switch: Push this switch to cancel the
pause and return to normal playing.
“AA” and “""” switches: Push and hold
the “AA” or “""” switch to fast forward
or reverse. When you release the switch,
the DVD player will resume playing.
Video CD only—
Push the “""” switch/button while paus-
ing, the video CD plays the slow−motion
video replay.
TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video
CD only)
Push the “Return” switch to turn on the
menu screen for the disc. You can also
turn on the menu screen by pushing the
“RETURN” button on the controller.
For the operation of the menu screen, see
the manual for the video CD.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
230
CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK
(video CD only)
Push the “Prev. Page” or “Next Page”
switch while the disc menu is displayed.
The next or previous page will appear on
the screen.
Push the “Prev. Page” or “Next Page”
switch while the player is playing video.
The next or previous track will be
searched and played.
CHANGING A MULTIPLEX
TRANSMISSION (video CD only)
Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a
multiplex transmission. The mode changes
from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back
to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”
switch.
CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video
CD only)
Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen
and then the initial setting screen will ap-
pear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-
troller. You can change the initial setting.
(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”
on page 220 in this Section for details.)
After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
231
Video CD
Audio CD
CD Text
USING THE CONTROL SCREEN
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-
ton on the controller. The control screen
will appear on the screen.
CD text only—
The disc title and track title will appear on
the screen when pushing the “DVD” but-
ton.
Details of the specific switches, controls
and features are described below.
1. “PICTURE” switch (video CD only)
Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn off
the control screen and return to the
picture previously displayed.
2. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “RPT” switch while the track
is playing. When the track ends, it will
automatically replay. To turn off the re-
peat feature, push this switch again.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
232
3. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “RAND” switch. The player
will play the tracks on the disc in ran-
dom order. To turn off the random fea-
ture, push this switch again.
4. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “SCAN” switch. The player
will scan all the tracks on the disc. To
stop scanning, push this switch again.
When the player has scanned all the
tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-
ning.
5. “
” and “ ” switches
Push the “
” or “ ” switch to fast
forward or reverse the disc. When you
push the switch again, the DVD player
will resume playing.
You can adjust the color, contrast, tone
and brightness of the screen.
Push the “DISPLAY” switch on the control-
ler and then the “Display” screen will ap-
pear.
The screen may turn purple to deflect the
sunlight. This is not a malfunction.
Each time you push the “+” or “−” switch,
you can adjust the color, contrast, tone
and brightness of the screen.
+ or
“GREEN”
− or “RED”
COLOR
Strengthens
the green
color
Strengthens
the red
color
CONTRAST
Strengthens
the contrast
Weakens
the contrast
TONE
Strengthens
the tone
Weakens
the tone
BRIGHTNESS Brightens Darkens
—Screen adjustment
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
233
After adjusting the screen, push the “OK”
switch to return to the previous screen.
The audio machine connected to the input
terminal adapter can be played in the
video mode.
To select the video mode, push the
“VIDEO” button on the controller. You can
also select the video mode on the mode
selection screen mentioned above.
—Selecting the video mode
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
234
DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS
This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-
or TV formats. DVD video discs con-
forming to other formats such as PAL
or SECAM cannot be used.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs
have a region code indicating where you
can use. If the DVD video disc is not
labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in
this DVD player. If you attempt to play an
inappropriate DVD video disc in this play-
er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on
the screen. Even if the DVD video disc
does not have a region code, in some
cases you cannot use it.
Marks shown on DVD video discs:
Indicates NTSC format
of color TV.
Indicates the number
of audio tracks.
Indicates the number
of language subtitles.
Indicates the number
of angles.
Indicates the screen
to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates regions in
which this video disc
can be played.
ALL: all countries
Number: region code
DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc
that holds video. DVD video discs have
adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-
dards of digital compression technologies.
The picture data is compressed by 1/40
on average and stored. Variable rate en-
coded technology in which the volume of
data assigned to the picture is changed
depending on the picture format has also
been adopted. Audio data is stored using
PCM and Dolby digital, which enables
higher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-
ti−angle and multi−language features will
also help you enjoy the more advanced
technology of DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits
what can be viewed in conformity with the
level of restrictions of the country. The
level of restrictions varies depending on
the DVD video disc. Some DVD video
discs cannot be played at all, or violent
scenes are skipped or replaced with other
scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can
be played.
Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children
and G−rated movies can be played.
—DVD video disc information
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
235
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can
be played.
Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the
same scene at different angles.
Multi−language feature: You can select
the language of the subtitles and audio.
Region codes: Region codes are provided
on DVD players and DVD discs. If the
DVD video disc does not have the same
region code as the DVD player, you can-
not play the disc on the DVD player. For
region codes, see page 234.
Audio: This DVD player can play liner
PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio
format DVD. Other decoded type cannot
be played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-
grams stored on DVD video discs are di-
vided in parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and
audio programs stored on DVD video
discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one
album, or one audio program is assigned
as a title.
Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title
comprises plural chapters.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and
the double−D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-
lished works.
E1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All
rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected
by method claims of certain U.S. pat-
ents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corpora-
tion and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision Cor-
poration, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision
Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.
The rear entertainment system plays vid-
eos and sound when an audio−video
equipment is connected to the A/V input
adapter. For details, refer to the manufac-
turer’s instructions.
—A/V input adapter
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
236
To use the adapter, open the cover.
The A/V input adapter is composed of 3
input adapters.
Yellow: Image input adapter
Red: Audio input adapter
White: Audio input adapter
NOTICE
Close the cover when the A/V input
adapter is not in use. Inserting any-
thing other than an appropriate plug
may cause electrical failure or short
circuit.
This power outlet is designed for use as
a power supply for the audio device con-
nected to the input terminal adapter.
The key must be in the “ON” position for
the power outlet to be used.
The maximum capacity for this power out-
let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.
Main switch
To use the power outlet, push the main
switch on the instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the power outlet is ready for use.
Push the main switch once again to turn
the power outlet off. When the power out-
let is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.
—Power outlet (115 VAC)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
237
NOTICE
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
anything other than an appropriate
plug that fits the outlet may cause
electrical failure or short circuit.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even if
their power consumption is under 115
VAC/100W. These appliances may not
operate properly.
D Appliances with high initial peak watt-
age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.
D Measuring devices which process pre-
cise data: medical equipment, measur-
ing instruments, etc.
D Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sen-
sor lamps, etc.
Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.
You can enjoy the rear seat entertain-
ment system with commercial head-
phones.
To use the headphones, connect them to
the jack.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
—Headphone jacks
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
238
To adjust the volume of the headphones,
turn the dial.
Left side dial: Turn it upward to increase
the volume, turn it downward to decrease
the volume.
Right side dial: Turn it downward to in-
crease the volume, turn it upward to de-
crease the volume.
The maximum volume depends on the
type of headphones.
The recommended headphone impedance
is from 16 Ω to 32 Ω.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details.
CAUTION
Adjust the volume when you connect
the headphones to the jack. Loud
sounds may have a significant impact
on the human body.
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio/video system
operation:
z Be careful not to spill beverages
over the system.
z Do not put anything other than a
cassette tape or Compact Disc into
the slot.
z Do not put anything other than a
DVD video, DVD audio, video CD,
dts−CD and audio CD into the DVD
player.
z The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
noise from the speakers of the sys-
tem which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radio—it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
Audio/video system operating
hints
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
239
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception prob-
lems that probably do not indicate a prob-
lem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmit-
ter. They are often accompanied by distor-
tion.
Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each oth-
er out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.
Static and fluttering—These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weak-
ened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the origi-
nal signal can be picked up again.
AM
Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere—especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio sta-
tion, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference—When a reflected sig-
nal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broad-
cast.
Static—AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electri-
cal motors. This results in static.
CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
AND TAPES
For the best performance for your cas-
sette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regu-
larly.
D A dirty tape head or tape path can
decrease sound quality and tangle your
cassette tapes. The easiest way to
clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
(A wet type is recommended.)
Use high−quality cassettes.
D Low−quality cassette tapes can cause
many problems, including poor sound,
inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto−reversing. They can also
get stuck or tangled in the cassette
player.
D Do not use a cassette if it has been
damaged or tangled or if its label is
peeling off.
D Do not leave a cassette in the player
if you are not listening to it, especially
if it is hot outside.
D Store cassettes in their cases and out
of direct sunlight.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
240
D Avoid using cassettes with a total play-
ing time longer than 100 minutes (50
minutes per side). The tape used in
these cassettes is thin and could get
stuck or tangled in the cassette player.
CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC
PLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS
D Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player and DVD
player from working. On hot days, use
the air conditioning to cool the vehicle
interior before you use the players.
D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make your compact disc player and
DVD player skip.
D If moisture gets into your compact disc
player and DVD player, the players
may not play even though they appear
to be working. Remove the disc from
the player and wait until it dries.
CAUTION
Compact disc players and DVD play-
ers use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation ex-
posure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the players correctly.
Compact disc player
D Use only compact discs marked as
shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
SACD
dts−CD
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
241
Audio CDs
DVD video
discs
DVD audio
discs
Video CDs
DVD player
D Use only discs marked as shown
above. The following products may not
be playable on your DVD player.
SACD
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
DVD−R
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD−RW
DVD−ROM
DVD−RAM
Special shaped discs
Transparent/translucent discs
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
242
Low quality discs
Labeled discs
NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transpar-
ent/translucent, low quality or labeled
discs such as those shown in the il-
lustrations. The use of such discs
may damage the player or changer, or
it may be impossible to eject the
disc.
Correct Wrong
D Handle compact discs carefully, espe-
cially when you are inserting them.
Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints
on them, particularly on the shiny side.
D Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or
other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)
D Remove discs from the compact disc
player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
243
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a
soft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-
ened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc
(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional
record cleaner or anti−static device.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
244
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
245
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Front manual air conditioning system
Controls 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front automatic air conditioning system
Controls
252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side vents 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear heater system 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning filter 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For information about the front air conditioning system of a vehicle
equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
SECTION 1− 9
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
246
1. Air intake selector
2. “A/C” button
3. Air flow selector
4. Temperature selector
5. Fan speed selector
Front manual air conditioning system—
—Controls
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
247
Fan speed selector
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to
the right to increase, to the left to de-
crease.
Temperature selector
Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—
to the right to warm, to the left to cool.
Air flow selector
Turn the knob to select the vents used for
air flow.
1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the
instrument panel vents.
2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
Turning the air flow selector to the
floor/windshield position turns on the
defogging function with the purpose of
clearing the front view.
This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-
take selector button once again.
5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
windshield vents.
Turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position turns on the defog-
ging function with the purpose of clear-
ing the front view.
This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
It is not possible to return to RECIR-
CULATE in this position.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “—Air flow selector settings” de-
scribed blow.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
248
Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-
tem.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automati-
cally to FRESH depending on the condi-
tion of the air conditioning system.
“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-
hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
249
D To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.
D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).
D On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.
D Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate through-
out the vehicle.
D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.
D When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-
hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except “OFF”.
—Air flow selector settings
—Operating tips
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
250
D If following another vehicle on a dusty
road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.
Heating
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Tow a r ds WARM
(red zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF
D For quick heating, select recirculated
air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh af-
ter the vehicle interior has been
warmed.
D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-
fied heating.
D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.
Air conditioning
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Tow a r ds COLD
(blue zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON
D For quick cooling, turning the tempera-
ture selector knob fully towards COLD
changes the air intake selector mode
to RECIRCULATE.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
251
Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Tow a r ds COLD
(blue zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF
Defogging
The inside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Tow a r ds WARM
(red zone) to heat;
COLD (blue zone) to
cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Turning the air flow selector to the wind-
shield position turns on the defogging
function with the purpose of clearing the
front view.
When turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
D On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield—the difference be-
tween the outside and inside tempera-
tures could make the fogging worse.
Defrosting
The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Tow a r ds WARM
(red zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Turning the air flow selector to the wind-
shield position turns on the defrosting
function with the purpose of clearing the
front view.
When turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
D To heat the vehicle interior while de-
frosting the windshield, choose
floor/windshield air flow.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
252
1. Air intake selector
2. “MODE” button (air flow selector)
3. Fan speed selector
4. “A/C” button
5. “OFF” button
6. Windshield air flow button
7. “AUTO” button
8. Temperature selector
Front automatic air conditioning system—
—Controls
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
253
“AUTO” button
For automatic operation of the air condi-
tioning, press the “AUTO” button. An indi-
cator light will illuminate to show that the
automatic operation mode has been se-
lected.
In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the tem-
perature.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
Fan speed selector
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to
the right to increase, to the left to de-
crease.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode.
Temperature selector
Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—
to the right to warm, to the left to cool.
“OFF” button
Push the button to turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
“MODE” button (air flow selector)
Push the “MODE” button to select the
vents used for air flow.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
another air flow mode.
1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the
instrument panel vents.
2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
Selecting the floor/windshield position
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-
take selector button once again.
Windshield air flow button
When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents and
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
This button allows the air intake to select
FRESH automatically. This is to clean up
the front view more quickly. It is not pos-
sible to return to RECIRCULATE in this
mode.
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defroster−linked air condition-
ing. This is to clean up the front view
more quickly.
When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
254
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “—Air flow selector settings” de-
scribed below.
Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-
tem.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes
extremely high, RECIRCULATE mode will
automatically be selected. This is not a
malfunction. When the engine coolant tem-
perature is lowered, the previous mode
will resume.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automati-
cally to FRESH depending on the condi-
tion of the air conditioning system.
“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-
hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
255
D To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.
D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).
D On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.
D Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate through-
out the vehicle.
D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.
D When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-
hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except “OFF”.
—Air flow selector settings
—Operating tips
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
256
D If following another vehicle on a dusty
road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.
Heating
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Tow a r ds WARM
(to the right)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF
D For quick heating, select recirculated
air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh af-
ter the vehicle interior has been
warmed.
D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-
fied heating.
D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.
Air conditioning
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—ON
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Tow a r ds COLD
(to the left)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON
D For quick cooling, select recirculated
air for a few minutes.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
257
Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—Tow a r ds COLD
(to the left)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Tow a r ds COLD
(to the left)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF
Defogging and defrosting—
—The inside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Temperature—Tow a r ds WARM
(to the right) to heat;
COLD (to the left) to
cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Tow a r ds WARM
(to the right) to heat;
COLD (to the left) to
cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
When pressing the windshield air flow but-
ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-
matically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly. It is not possible to
return to RECIRCULATE in this mode.
Pressing the windshield button turns on
the defroster−linked air conditioning. This
is to clean up the front view more quickly.
When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.
D On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield—the difference be-
tween the outside and inside tempera-
tures could make the fogging worse.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
258
—The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Temperature—Tow a r ds WARM
(to the right)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Tow a r ds WARM
(to the right)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
When pressing the windshield air flow but-
ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-
matically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly. It is not possible to
return to RECIRCULATE in this mode.
Pressing the windshield button turns on
the defroster−linked air conditioning. This
is to clean up the front view more quickly.
When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.
D To heat the vehicle interior while de-
frosting the windshield, choose
floor/windshield air flow.
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the side vents. The side vents may be
opened or closed as shown.
Side vents
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
259
1. Main switch
Push the switch to turn the rear heater
system on or off.
Turning the fan speed selector to the “LO”
or “HI” position with the rear heater sys-
tem on illuminates the main switch indica-
tor.
2. Fan speed selector
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to
the right to increase, to the left to de-
crease.
When the rear heater system is off, the
fan speed selector will not operate.
3. Rear heater vents
Air flows from the vents when the rear
heater system is operating.
CAUTION
Do not place feet near the vents for
long periods as burns may result.
Rear heater system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
260
The air conditioning filter information
label is placed in the glove box as
shown and indicates that a filter has
been installed.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust
from entering the vehicle through the air
conditioning vent.
The air conditioning filter is behind the
glove box.
The air conditioning filter may clog af-
ter long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air condi-
tioning and heater experiences extreme
reductions in operating efficiency, or if
the windows begin to fog up easily.
To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
inspect and replace the air conditioning
filter according to the maintenance sched-
ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy
traffic flow, such as inner city or desert
areas, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-
nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment”.)
Air conditioning filter—
—Checking and replacing the
air conditioning filter
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
261
1. Remove the clip with a Phillips−head
screwdriver.
2. Open the glove box and push each
side of the glove box to disconnect
the claws.
3. Pull the filter cover toward you and
remove it.
4. Remove the filter case toward you.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
262
5. Remove the filter from the filter
case.
6. Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.
When installing the filter and filter
case, keep the arrow pointing up.
INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed prop-
erly in position. The use of air condi-
tioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof per-
formance and then affect air condi-
tioning performance.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
263
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Multi−information display 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtrays 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlet 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Container 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottle holders 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie−down hooks 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof luggage carrier 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For information about the clock of a vehicle equipped with
Navigation system, please refer to the separate “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”.
SECTION 1− 10
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
264
Air conditioning system on—
Air conditioning system off—
The multi−information display indicates
the following information.
1. Outside temperature
2. Average vehicle speed
3. Average fuel consumption
4. Instantaneous fuel consumption
5. Driving time
6. Air conditioning system on—The air
conditioned temperature is displayed.
Air conditioning system off—The air
conditioned temperature is not dis-
played.
Every time you push the “INFO” button,
the display toggles through this informa-
tion.
The displayed values in the multi−informa-
tion display indicate general driving condi-
tions. Accuracy varies with driving habits
and road conditions.
You can adjust the air conditioned temper-
ature while the multi−information is operat-
ing. 5 seconds has been passed after ad-
justing the temperature or pushing the
“INFO” button, the display will be back to
the multi−information display.
1. Outside temperature
(“OUTSIDE TEMP”)
The outside temperature display indi-
cates the outside air temperature.
The displayed temperature ranges from
−22_F (−30_C) up to 122_F (50_C).
If an abnormality exists in the connection
of the outside air temperature sensor,
“−−_F” (“−−_C”) will appear on the display.
If “−−_F” (“−−_C”) appears on the display,
contact your Toyota dealer.
There may be a case that “−−_F” (“−−_C”)
appears momentarily when the ignition is
quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it
goes out soon.
2. Average vehicle speed
(“AVG MPH” or “AVG km/h”)
Average vehicle speed is calculated and
displayed based on total driving dis-
tance and total driving time with the
engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.
To reset the calculation, push the “INFO”
button for more than 1 second.
Multi−information display
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
265
3. Average fuel consumption
(“AVG MPG” or “AVG L/100 km”)
Average fuel consumption is calculated
and displayed based on total driving
distance and total fuel consumption
with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.
4. Instantaneous fuel consumption
(“MPG” or “L/100 km”)
The instantaneous fuel consumption is
calculated and displayed based on dis-
tance and fuel consumption for 1 sec-
onds with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 2
seconds.
Note that an accurate figure may not be
shown in the following cases.
D The vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. (The display will indicate the
extremely high fuel consumption.)
D The vehicle is driving down a long
slope applying the engine brake. (The
display will indicate the extremely low
fuel consumption.)
The calculation is reset when the ignition
switch is turned off.
5. Driving time (“E/T”)
The elapsed time after the engine starts
is displayed.
When the engine is started, driving time
is counted from 0:00. Up to 11:59 (11
hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed.
When the driving time exceeds 11:59, the
counter returns to 0:00.
The calculation is reset when the ignition
switch is turned off.
To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.
To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time dis-
play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
Clock
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
266
The direction is indicated on the inside
rear view mirror.
If the ignition switch was turned off with
the system on, the system will automati-
cally turn back on when the ignition switch
is turned on.
Push the “COMP” switch to turn the com-
pass system on and off.
The compass indicates the direction
that the vehicle is heading. In the
above case, it shows that the vehicle is
heading north.
Displays
Directions
N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW
North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest
The compass may not show the correct
direction in the following conditions:
D The vehicle is stopped immediately af-
ter turning.
D The compass does not adjust while the
vehicle is stopped.
D The ignition switch is turned off imme-
diately after turning.
D The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
D The vehicle is in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-
terference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
D The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a
magnet or a metal object on or near
the inside rear view mirror.)
D The battery has been disconnected.
If your vehicle is out of the set zone,
refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”
below to set the zone number.
If the deviation is small, the compass
works to calibrate the direction automati-
cally while the vehicle is in motion.
For additional precision or for complete
calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE
COMPASS” below.
Compass
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
267
Compass sensor
The compass sensor is in the inside
rear view mirror.
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object
on or near the inside rear view mirror
of the vehicle. Doing this may cause
malfunction of the compass sensor.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation
calibration)
The direction display on the compass
deviates from the true direction deter-
mined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
angle of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,
then push and hold the “COMP” switch
until the zone number appears on the dis-
play. Then push the “COMP” switch, refer-
ring to the following map to select the
number of the zone where the vehicle is.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
268
Zone number
After calibration, leaving the system for
several seconds returns it to the compass
mode.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
269
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling
calibration)
Sometimes the direction display on the
compass may not change after a turn. To
rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and
hold the “COMP” switch until “C” appears
on the display.
If “C” appears on the display because of
a drastic change in the magnetic field,
perform circling calibration.
Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5
mph) or less. If there is not enough space
to drive in a circle, drive around the
block.
After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above
method, calibration is completed when the
direction is shown on the display.
If calibration cannot be performed because
of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your
vehicle to Toyota dealer.
Perform circling calibration just after
you have purchased your Toyota. And
then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, re-
placed or disconnected.
D Do not perform circling calibration of
the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-
terference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
D During calibration, do not operate elec-
tric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with
the calibration.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
270
CAUTION
D When doing the circling calibration,
be sure to secure a wide space,
and watch out for people and ve-
hicles in the neighborhood. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while
performing circling calibration.
D Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Cigarette lighter
Front ashtray
Rear ashtray
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.
After it finishes heating up, it automati-
cally pops out ready for use.
If the engine is not running, the key must
be in the “ACC” position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in.
Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or
equivalent for replacement.
Cigarette lighter and ashtrays
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
271
ASHTRAYS
Front ashtray: To use the ashtray, open
the lid.
When finished with your cigarette, thor-
oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-
vent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid
completely.
To remove the ashtray, pull the lid and
pull it out.
Rear ashtray: To use the ashtray, pull
it out.
When finished with your cigarette, thor-
oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-
vent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid
completely.
To remove the ashtray, press down on the
lock spring plate and pull out.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, always completely close
the ashtray after use.
Front
Rear
The power outlets (12 VDC) are de-
signed for power supply for car acces-
sories.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position for the power outlets to be used.
NOTICE
z To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of 12
VDC/120W (front and rear outlets
together).
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting a foreign object other than
the appropriate plug that fits the
outlet, or allowing any liquid into
the outlet may cause electrical fail-
ure or short circuits.
Power outlets (12 VDC)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
272
This power outlet (115 VAC) is designed
for use as a power supply for electric
appliances in the vehicle.
The key must be in the “ON” position for
the power outlet to be used.
The maximum capacity for this power out-
let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.
Main switch
To use the power outlet, push the main
switch on the instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the power outlet is ready for use.
Push the main switch once again to turn
the power outlet off. When the power out-
let is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.
NOTICE
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
anything other than an appropriate
plug that fits the outlet may cause
electrical failure or short circuits.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even
though their power consumption is un-
der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances
may not operate properly.
Power outlet (115 VAC)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
273
D Appliances with high initial peak watt-
age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.
D Measuring devices which process pre-
cise data: medical equipment, measur-
ing instruments, etc.
D Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sen-
sor lamps, etc.
Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.
To use the glove box:
Open by pulling the lever.
Lock by inserting the master key and turn-
ing it clockwise.
Unlock by inserting the master key and
turning it counterclockwise.
With the instrument panel lights on, the
glove box light will come on when the
globe box is open.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.
Glove box
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
274
Indicator light
Buttons
The garage door opener (
R
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink
R
and can
be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.
(a) Programming the HomeLink
R
The HomeLink
R
in your vehicle has 3
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the
HomeLink
R
, install a new battery in the
hand−held transmitter prior to program-
ming.
The battery side of the hand−held trans-
mitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink
R
during the programming pro-
cess.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in “Programming an entrance gate/pro-
gramming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink
R
buttons
you want to program.
HomeLinkr
Hand−held
garage
transmitter
25 to
75 mm
(1 to 3 in.)
2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-
ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
the surface of the HomeLink
R
.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
R
in view while programming.
Garage door opener
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
275
3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand−held garage transmitter button
along with the selected HomeLink
R
but-
ton.
4. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink
R
changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink
R
by
pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens
and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, iden-
tify if your garage transmitter is of the
“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
R
button. The ga-
rage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLink
R
)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after
2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is
the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code sys-
tem”.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-
maining HomeLink
R
button to program
another device.
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code”
equipped, it is necessary to follow
steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink
R
” before
proceeding with the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-
ing mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door
opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-
ing mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-
grammed HomeLink
R
button twice. The
garage door may open. If the door
does open, the programming process is
complete. If the door does not open,
press and release the button a third
time. This third press and release will
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
276
The ceiling mounted garage door opener
motor should now recognize the
HomeLink
R
unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-
maining HomeLink
R
button to program
another rolling code system.
Programming an entrance gate/program-
ming all devices in the Canadian market
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink
R
but-
tons you want to program.
2. Place your hand−held gate/device
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
away from the surface of the
HomeLink
R
.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
R
in view while programming.
3. Press and hold the selected
HomeLink
R
button.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
the hand−held gate/device transmitter
button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink
R
changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink
R
by
pressing the newly programmed button.
Check to see if the gate/device oper-
ates correctly.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-
maining HomeLink
R
button to program
another device.
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home
security systems, home door locks or
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLink
R
buttons cannot be
erased, however, to reprogram a single
button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink
R
”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
R
To operate the HomeLink
R
, press the
appropriate HomeLink
R
button to activate
the programmed device. The HomeLink
R
indicator light should come on. The
HomeLink
R
continues to send the signal
for up to 20 seconds as long as the
button is pressed.
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink
R
memory (all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes
at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink
R
memory.
For additional programming assistance
with your HomeLink
R
Universal
Transceiver call the:
D Toyota Customer Experience Center at
1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)
D Toyota Canada Customer Interaction
Centre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
277
Refer to HomeLink
R
on the internet at:
WWW.HOMELINK.COM
CAUTION
D When programming the HomeLink
R
Universal Transceiver, you may be
operating a garage door or other
device. Make sure people and ob-
jects are out of the way of the ga-
rage door or other device to pre-
vent potential harm or damage.
D Do not use this HomeLink
R
Univer-
sal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as re-
quired by federal safety standards.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door open-
er which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and re-
verse), does not meet current feder-
al safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been
tested and complies with FCC and IC
rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
device.
To use the auxiliary boxes, open the
lids as shown in the following illustra-
tions.
CAUTION
D To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary box
closed while driving.
D Type A—It is designed for holding
a light objects, do not place any
heavy objects in it. Heavy objects
may cause the holder to open and
contents to fly out resulting in inju-
ries.
NOTICE
Type A—During hot weather, the inte-
rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.
Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses,
etc. inside.
Auxiliary boxes
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
278
Type A (ceiling)
Type B (instrument panel)
Type C (rear console)
Type D (rear console)
Type E (luggage compartment)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
279
Type F (luggage compartment)
This container can be used as an auxil-
iary holder.
CAUTION
Do not put objects in the container
which can shift, roll out or be thrown
out in the event of sudden stops or
accidents. Objects which come out of
the container can create a safety haz-
ard due to interference with pedal op-
eration or driver distraction.
D Do not store drinks or cans which
could easily roll out.
Container
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
280
D Do not store objects which are
higher than the lower edge of the
container.
D Do not store objects which are larg-
er than the width of the container.
Type A (rear console)
Type B (luggage compartment) Type C (second seat armrest)
Cup holders
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
281
The cup holders are designed for hold-
ing cups or drink−cans securely.
Type A—To use the holder, open the lid.
Type C—To use the holder, pull down the
second seat armrest and push the button
on the armrest.
Type A only—
The cup holder can be adjustable to the
size of the cups or drink−cans by
changing the holder position.
CAUTION
D Do not place anything else other
than cups or drink−cans in the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment
and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident.
D Type A and C—To reduce the
chance of injury in case of an acci-
dent or sudden stop while driving,
keep the cup holder closed when it
is not in use.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
282
The bottle holders are designed to hold
bottles securely.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to use the holder for
any other purpose for which it was
intended. Inappropriately sized or
shaped objects may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly in-
jure people in the vehicle during a
sudden braking or an accident.
NOTICE
Do not put a cup or open bottle in
the bottle holder because the con-
tents may spill when the door opens
or closes.
To secure your luggage, use the tie−down
hooks as shown above.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 313
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−
down hooks folded in place on the
floor when not in use.
Vehicles with the third seat—When using
the tie−down hooks, the third seat must
be folded down. (See “—Folding down
third seat” on page 49 in Section 1−3.)
Bottle holders Tie−down hooks
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
283
NOTICE
Do not use the anchor brackets on
the second seat seatback instead of
the tie−down hooks.
USING LUGGAGE COVER
To use the luggage cover:
1. Pull out the forward luggage cover
and hang the hooks to the hook
brackets on the second seat seat-
back.
2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and
secure it to the hook brackets.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the luggage
cover. Such items may be thrown
about and possibly injure people in
the vehicle during sudden braking or
a collision.
Vehicles with the third seat—When using
the luggage cover, the third seat must be
folded down. (See “—Folding down third
seat” on page 49 in Section 1−3.)
Luggage cover
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
284
REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER
To remove the luggage cover, push in
the left end to release the right end,
and lift the luggage cover out.
After you remove the luggage cover, stow
it under deck board as described below.
This will prevent passengers from injury in
the event of a sudden stop or accident.
STOWING LUGGAGE COVER
To stow the luggage cover, do the fol-
lowing.
1. Remove the side deck boards and
open the center deck board.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
285
2. Push in the left end of the luggage
cover and place the luggage cover in
the holder as shown.
CAUTION
Make sure the luggage cover is se-
curely stowed.
Cross rails
Roof rails
The roof luggage carrier consists of
roof rails and sliding cross rails.
Upper
knob
Side knobs
ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF CROSS
RAILS:
1. Turn the upper and side knobs coun-
terclockwise to loosen the cross
rails.
Roof luggage carrier
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
286
2. Slide the cross rails to the appropri-
ate position for loading the luggages
and turn the side knobs clockwise to
tighten the cross rails securely.
Vehicles with the electric moon
roof—There are cross rail stoppers on the
roof rails which help you prevent the
cross rails being touched with the tilted up
moon roof.
NOTICE
Vehicles with the electric moon roof
only—Do not remove the cross rail
stoppers, or the moon roof may be
damaged when it is tilted.
3. In order to fix the cross rails to the
appropriate length, turn the upper
knobs clockwise after tightening all
of the side knobs.
CAUTION
Make sure the cross rails are fixed
securely by pushing forward and rear-
ward them. Failure to do so may
cause an unexpected accident or se-
vere injury in the event of emergency
braking or a collision.
Follow the manufacture’s instructions and
precautions when installing the attach-
ments or their equivalent.
CAUTION
When you load cargo on the roof lug-
gage carrier, observe the following:
D Place the cargo so that its weight
is distributed evenly between the
front and rear axles.
D If loading long or wide cargo, never
exceed the vehicle overall length or
width. (See “Dimensions and
weights” on page 404 in Section 8
for information on your vehicle
overall length and width.)
D Before driving, make sure the cargo
is securely fastened on the roof
luggage carrier.
D Loading cargo on the roof luggage
carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneu-
vers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
287
D If driving for a long distance, on
rough roads, or at high speeds,
stop the vehicle now and then dur-
ing the trip to make sure the cargo
remains in its place.
D Do not exceed 45 kg (100 lb.) cargo
weight on the roof luggage carrier.
NOTICE
When loading the luggages, be careful
not to scratch the surface of the
moon roof.
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2
holes, then they are designed for use with
locking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock-
ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.
CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the floor carpet. If the floor
mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driv-
ing, it may cause an accident.
Floor mat
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
288
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
289
INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Information before driving your Toyota
Off−road vehicle precautions 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break−in period 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three−way catalytic converters 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iridium−tipped spark plugs 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
290
This vehicle belongs to the utility ve-
hicle class, which has higher ground
clearance and narrower tread in relation
to the height of its center of gravity to
make it capable of performing in a wide
variety of off−road applications. Specific
design characteristics give it a higher
center of gravity than ordinary passen-
ger cars. This vehicle design feature
causes this type of vehicle to be more
likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. An advan-
tage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road allowing you
to anticipate problems. It is not de-
signed for cornering at the same
speeds as ordinary passenger cars any
more than low−slung sports cars de-
signed to perform satisfactorily under
off−road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause
rollover.
CAUTION
Always observe the following precau-
tions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle:
D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-
son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing.
D Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers, if at all possible. Failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover causing death or serious
injury.
D Loading cargo on the roof luggage
carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneu-
vers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly.
Off−road vehicle precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
291
D Always slow down in gusty cross-
winds. Because of its profile and
higher center of gravity, your ve-
hicle is more sensitive to side
winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to
have better control.
D When driving off−road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause
loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
chassis.
D Do not drive horizontally across
steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your ve-
hicle (or any similar off−road ve-
hicle) can tip over sideways much
more easily than forward or back-
ward.
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break−in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:
D Avoid full throttle acceleration when
starting and driving.
D Avoid racing the engine.
D Try to avoid hard stops during the first
300 km (200 miles).
D Do not drive for a long time at any
single speed, either fast or slow.
D Do not tow a trailer during the first 800
km (500 miles).
FUEL TYPE
Your new vehicle must use only un-
leaded gasoline.
To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with un-
leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-
dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
in Canada.
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its ef-
fectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.
Break−in period Fuel
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
292
OCTANE RATING
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine: Se-
lect Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane
Number 91) or higher.
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine: Select Oc-
tane Rating 87 (Research Octane Num-
ber 91) or higher. For improved vehicle
performance, use premium unleaded
gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating or research octane number lower
than stated above will cause persistent
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will
lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks...
If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accel-
erating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT
ADDITIVES
Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.
QUALITY GASOLINE
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of four categories
that depend on required emission lev-
els. In the U.S., category 3 or 4 has
been adopted. The WWFC improves air
quality by providing for better emis-
sions in vehicle fleets, and customer
satisfaction through better vehicle per-
formance.
CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-
formulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-
oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-
prove air quality.
OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
293
GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane en-
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-
taining MMT is used, your emission con-
trol system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-
strument cluster may come on. If this hap-
pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-
vice.
GASOLINE QUALITY
In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the partic-
ular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
z Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel sys-
tem damage or vehicle performance
problems.
z If driveability problems occur (poor
hot starting, vaporizing, engine
knock, etc.), discontinue the use.
z Take care not to spill gasohol dur-
ing refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
72.5 L (19.1 gal., 16.0 Imp. gal.)
The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-
plying fuel to the engine to minimize the
risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start
it.
CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
before restarting the engine. If you
find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it is the fuel system has
been damaged and it is in need of
repair. In this case, do not restart the
engine.
Fuel pump shut off system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
294
If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...
First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the cor-
rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
The three−way catalytic converter is an
emission control device installed in the
exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.
CAUTION
D Keep people and combustible mate-
rials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
D Do not idle or park your vehicle
over anything that might burn easi-
ly such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.
Operation in foreign countries Three−way catalytic converters
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
295
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three−way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
z Use only unleaded gasoline.
z Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creat-
ing an excessive load on the three−
way catalytic converter.
z Do not allow the engine to run at
idle speed for more than 20 min-
utes.
z Avoid racing the engine.
z Do not push−start or pull−start your
vehicle.
z Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.
z Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel systems could cause an ex-
tremely high three−way catalytic
converter temperature.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check−up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three−way catalytic converter sys-
tem best.
z To ensure that the three−way cata-
lytic converter and the entire emis-
sion control system operate proper-
ly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment”.
CAUTION
D Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.
It contains carbon monoxide, which
is a colorless and odorless gas. It
can cause unconsciousness or even
death.
D Make sure the exhaust system has
no holes or loose connections. The
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something,
or notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust, have the system
checked immediately.
D Do not run the engine in a garage
or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.
D Do not remain for a long time in a
parked vehicle with the engine run-
ning. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.
Engine exhaust cautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
296
D Keep the back door closed while
driving. An open or unsealed back
door may cause exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle.
D To allow proper operation of your
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the wind-
shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-
er obstructions.
D If you smell exhaust fumes in the
vehicle, drive with the windows
open and the back door closed.
Have the cause immediately located
and corrected.
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in main-
taining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should con-
sume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.
D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston
rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a pis-
ton moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
of this oil into the combustion chamber.
This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.
D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems
of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High tem-
perature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.
The amount of engine oil consumed de-
pends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-
ing and frequent acceleration and decel-
eration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000
km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600
miles)
When judging the amount of oil con-
sumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.
Facts about engine oil
consumption
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
297
IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK
One of the most important points in prop-
er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-
gine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check,
see “Checking the engine oil level” on
page 380 in Section 7−2.
Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
spark plugs.
NOTICE
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.
Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-
mance or smooth driveability.
The tandem master cylinder brake system
is a hydraulic system with two separate
sub−systems. If either sub−system should
fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your
stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to
power−assist the brakes. If the engine
should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal
pedal pressure. There is enough reserved
vacuum for one or two stops—but no
more!
Iridium−tipped spark plugs Brake system
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
298
CAUTION
D Do not pump the brake pedal if the
engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your reserved vacu-
um.
D Even if the power assist is com-
pletely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than nor-
mal. And your braking distance will
increase.
ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(with “ABS” warning light)
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock−up of the wheels
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steer-
ing performance of the vehicle under
these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performan-
ce.
The anti−lock brake system becomes op-
erative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-
er, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-
tem.
You may hear a click or motor sound in
the engine compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just after
the vehicle begins to move. This means
that the anti−lock brake system is in the
self−check mode, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is ac-
tivated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-
tion of the system:
D You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-
tem operating and feel the brake pedal
pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-
hicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the ve-
hicle is stopped.
D At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-
tem activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
299
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing ve-
hicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, be-
cause there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.
Anti−lock brake system is not de-
signed to shorten the stopping dis-
tance: Always drive at the moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping dis-
tance in the following cases:
D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.
D Driving with tire chains installed.
D Driving over the steps such as the
joints on the road.
D Driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has other differ-
ences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respec-
tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping dis-
tance.
Type A
Type B
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
300
“ABS” warning light
The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−
lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the
system malfunctions, the light comes on
again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system, the brake assist
system, the traction control system and
the vehicle stability control system do not
operate, but the brake system still oper-
ates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the components moni-
tored by the warning light system. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, or remains on.
D The light comes on while you are driv-
ing.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warn-
ing light, immediately stop your ve-
hicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unsta-
ble during braking.
DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
SYSTEM
Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type
parking brake system. This type of brake
system needs bedding−down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-
ding−down.
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM
If you slam the brakes on such as in
an emergency or apply the brakes more
firmly than usual such as when de-
scending the hill with the designated
number of occupants in the vehicle, the
brake assist system provides more
powerful braking.
If you slam the brakes on or apply the
brakes more firmly, more powerful braking
will be applied. At this time, you may hear
a sound in the engine compartment and
feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes opera-
tive after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warn-
ing light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 133 in Sec-
tion 1−6.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
301
The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-
tor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.
The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.
Brake pad wear limit
indicators
Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification
number
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
302
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.
Your new vehicle carries theft preven-
tion labels which are approximately 47
mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-
ing the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroy-
ing the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to anoth-
er, will be impossible.
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may vio-
late certain state or federal laws.
—Engine number
Theft prevention labels
(except for Canada)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
303
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling charac-
teristics, resulting in loss of control.
Suspension and chassis
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
304
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” on page 306.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 305.
3. Uniform tire quality gra-
ding—For details, see “—Uniform
tire quality grading” on page 307.
4. The location of the tread wear
indicators—For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 387.
5. Tire ply composition and mate-
rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-
ber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.
Tire information—
—Tire symbols
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
305
7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not
have a tube inside the tire and air
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 387.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pres-
sure to which a tire may be in-
flated. For details about recom-
mended cold tire inflation
pressure, see “Tires” on page 408.
10.Summer tire or all season
tire—An all season tire has “M+S”
on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer
tire. For details, see “Types of
tires” on page 315.
This illustration indicates typical DOT
and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
1. “DOT” symbol
2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year
The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
306
This illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,
T=Temporary use)
2. Section width (in millimeters)
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width)
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,
D=Diagonal)
5. Wheel diameter (in inches)
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one
letter)
1. Section width
2. Tire height
3. Wheel diameter
1. Bead
2. Sidewall
3. Shoulder
4. Tread
5. Belt
6. Inner liner
7. Reinforcing rubber
8. Carcass
9. Rim lines
10.Bead wires
11.Chafer
—Tire size —Name of each section of tire
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
307
This information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safe-
ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-
formation on uniform tire quality grad-
ing.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
DOT quality grades—All passenger
vehicle tires must conform to Fed-
eral Safety Requirements in addi-
tion to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum sec-
tion width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear—The treadwear grade is
a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested un-
der controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1−1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving hab-
its, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor trac-
tion performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning)
traction.
—Uniform tire quality grading
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
308
Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-
ture grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of per-
formance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
309
Tire related term Meaning
Accessory weight
the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items
are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Cold tire inflation pressure
tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile
under that condition
Curb weight
the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional engine
Intended outboard sidewall
(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Maximum inflation pressure
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it
is shown on the sidewall of the tire
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
the sum of—
(a) curb weight;
(b) accessory weight;
(c) vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) production options weight
—Glossary of tire terminology
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
310
Tire related term Meaning
Normal occupant weight
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that follows
Occupant distribution
distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
1 that follows
Production options weight
the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing
over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special
trim
Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Rim
a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation rim diameter and width
Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-
nated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
311
Tire related term Meaning
Vehicle normal load on the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity,
number of occupants
Vehicle normal load, number of
occupants
Occupant distribution in a normally
loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
312
Vehicle load limits include total load
capacity, seating capacity, towing ca-
pacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below. Total load ca-
pacity and seating capacity are also
described on the tire and loading in-
formation label. For location of the tire
and loading information label, see
“Checking tire inflation pressure” on
page 385.
Total load capacity:
Without third seat
390 kg (860 lb.)
With third seat
526 kg (1159 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined
weight of occupants, cargo and lug-
gage. Tongue load is included when
trailer towing.
Seating capacity:
Without third seat
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
With third seat
Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)
Seating capacity means the maximum
number of occupants whose esti-
mated average weight is 68 kg (150
lb.) per person. Depending on the
weight of each person, the seating ca-
pacity given may exceed the total
load capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants
are within the seating capacity,
do not exceed the total load ca-
pacity.
Towing capacity:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
680 kg (1500 lb.)
With towing package
1360 kg (3000 lb.)
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
907 kg (2000 lb.)
With towing package
1585 kg (3500 lb.)
Towing capacity means the maximum
gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo weight) that your vehicle is
able to tow.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or de-
crease depending on the size (weight)
and the number of occupants. For de-
tails, see “—Capacity and distribu-
tion” on page 314.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than
each load limit. That may cause
not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering
ability and braking ability, which
may cause an accident.
Vehicle load limits
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
313
When stowing cargo and luggage in
the vehicle, observe the following:
D Put cargo and luggage in the lug-
gage compartment when at all
possible. Be sure all items are se-
cured in place.
D Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-
anced. Locating the weight as far
forward as possible helps maintain
balance.
D For better fuel economy, do not
carry unneeded weight.
CAUTION
D To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during
braking, do not stack anything
in the luggage compartment
higher than the seatbacks.
Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as pos-
sible.
D Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It is
not designed for passengers.
They should ride in their seats
with their seat belts properly
fastened. Otherwise, they are
much more likely suffer seri-
ous bodily injury, in the event
of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
D Do not place anything on the
flattened seat, or it may slide
forward during braking.
D Do not place anything on the
luggage cover. Such items may
be thrown about and possibly
injure people in the vehicle
during sudden braking or an
accident. Secure all items in a
safe place.
D Do not drive with objects left
on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they
may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and im-
pair the driver’s control of the
vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occu-
pants.
D Do not put objects in the con-
tainer which can shift, roll out
or be thrown out in the event
of sudden stops or accidents.
Objects which come out of the
container can create a safety
hazard due to interference with
pedal operation or driver dis-
traction.
Cargo and luggage—
—Stowage precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
314
Cargo capacity depends on the to-
tal weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-
ity) – (Total weight of occupants)
STEPS FOR DETERMINING
CORRECT LOAD LIMIT
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available car-
go and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see
page 323.
Cargo
capacity
Total load
capacity
EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE
In case that 2 people with the com-
bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are
riding in your vehicle, the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity will be as follows:
Without third seat
Total load capacity: 390 kg (860 lb.)
390 kg – 166 kg = 224 kg.
(860 lb. – 366 lb. = 494 lb.)
With third seat
Total load capacity: 526 kg (1159 lb.)
526 kg – 166 kg = 360 kg.
(1159 lb. – 366 lb. = 793 lb.)
—Capacity and distribution
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
315
From this condition, if 3 more passen-
gers with the combined weight of 176
kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-
go and luggage load will be reduced
as follows:
Without third seat
224 kg – 176 kg = 48 kg.
(494 lb. – 388 lb. = 106 lb.)
With third seat
360 kg – 176 kg = 184 kg.
(793 lb. – 388 lb. = 405 lb.)
As shown in the above example, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load equaling the
combined weight of occupants who
got on later must be reduced. In other
words, if the increase in the number
of occupants causes the excess of
the total load capacity (combined
weight of occupants plus cargo and
luggage load), you have to reduce the
cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity,
see “Vehicle load limits” on page 312.
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occu-
pant’s weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capac-
ity, do not apply the load uneven-
ly. That may cause not only dam-
age to the tire but also deteriora-
tion to the steering ability due to
unbalance of the vehicle, causing
an accident.
Determine what kind of tires your
vehicle is originally equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capabil-
ity tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as snow
tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow−covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow−covered or icy
roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If installing snow tires, be sure
to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to pro-
vide better traction in snow and to be
adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year
round.
Types of tires
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
316
All season tires, however, do not have
adequate traction performance
compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer
tires in highway driving.
CAUTION
D Do not mix summer and all sea-
son tires on your vehicle as
this can cause dangerous han-
dling characteristics, resulting
in loss of control.
D Do not use tire other than the
manufacturer’s designated
tires, and never mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different
from the originals.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
317
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Before starting the engine 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off−road driving precautions 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 328. . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
318
1. Check the area around the vehicle be-
fore entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion angle, seat height, head
restraint height and steering wheel
angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.
4. Lock all side doors and back door.
5. Fasten seat belts.
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
sories.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you
need to restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, put the selector le-
ver in “N”. A starter safety device will
prevent the starter from operating if the
selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the floor until driving off.
Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-
low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-
ing”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-
tial multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:
With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
crank the engine by turning the key to
“START”. Release it when the engine
starts.
Engine should be warmed up by driving,
not in idle. For warming up, drive with
smoothly turning engine until engine cool-
ant temperature is within normal range.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct proce-
dure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start...
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page
332 in Section 4.
Before starting the engine
How to start the engine—
(a) Before cranking
(b) Starting the engine
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
319
NOTICE
z Do not crank for more than 30 se-
conds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.
z Do not race a cold engine.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.
D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
This will allow you much better control.
D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-
sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp−edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-
wise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.
D When parking on a hill, turn the front
wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and place the transmis-
sion in “P”. If necessary, block the
wheels.
D Washing your vehicle or driving through
deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the park-
ing brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
D Before driving off, make sure that
the parking brake is fully released
and the parking brake reminder
light is off.
D Do not leave your vehicle unat-
tended while the engine is running.
D Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.
D To drive down a long or steep hill,
reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.
D Be careful when accelerating, up-
shifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-
tion or engine braking, could cause
the vehicle to skid or spin.
Tips for driving in various
conditions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
320
D Do not drive in excess of the speed
limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high−speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control
and possible injury. Be sure to con-
sult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high−speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.
D Do not continue normal driving
when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a
longer stopping distance, and it
may pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Also, the park-
ing brake will not hold the vehicle
securely.
When driving your vehicle off−road, please
observe the following precautions to en-
sure your driving enjoyment and to help
prevent the closure of areas to off−road
vehicles.
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
off−road vehicles are permitted to trav-
el.
b. Respect private property. Get owner’s
permission before entering private prop-
erty.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed.
Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-
strict travel.
d. Stay on established roads. When condi-
tions are wet, driving techniques should
be changed or travel delayed to pre-
vent damage to roads.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining
to driving your vehicle off−road, consult
the following organizations.
D State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments
D State Motor Vehicle Bureau
D Recreational Vehicle Clubs
D U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of
Land Management
CAUTION
Always observe the following precau-
tions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle:
D Drive carefully when off the road.
Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous places.
D Do not grip the steering wheel
spokes when driving off−road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel and
injure your hands. Keep both hands
and especially your thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
D Always check your brakes for effec-
tiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.
D After driving through tall grass,
mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
trapped on the underbody. Clear off
any such matter from the under-
body. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering
to the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.
Off−road driving precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
321
D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-
son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is mo-
ving.
D When driving off−road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause
loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
chassis.
NOTICE
z If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the river bed for
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.
z Take all necessary safety measures
to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does
not occur.
Water entering the engine air intake
will cause severe engine damage.
Water can wash the grease from
wheel bearings, causing rusting and
premature failure, and may also en-
ter the differentials, transmission
and transfer case, reducing the gear
oil’s lubricating qualities.
z Sand and mud that has accumulated
in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system com-
ponents.
z Always perform a maintenance in-
spection after each day of off−road
driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
For scheduled maintenance informa-
tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-
tenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.
Make sure your coolant is properly pro-
tected against freezing.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with long−life hybrid organic acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
See “Checking the engine coolant level”
on page 382 in Section 7−2 for details of
coolant type selection.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant pro-
vides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant pro-
vides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
Winter driving tips
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
322
Check the condition of the battery and
cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any battery, so it must be in top shape
to provide enough power for winter start-
ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visually
inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer
and most service stations will be pleased
to check the level of charge.
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.
See page 380 in Section 7−2 for recom-
mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-
mer oil in your vehicle during winter
months may cause harder starting. If you
are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased
to help.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an anti-
freeze solution.
This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may dam-
age your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into
“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not use
the parking brake, or snow or water accu-
mulated in and around the parking brake
mechanism may freeze, making it hard to
release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emer-
gency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.
Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.
Dinghy towing
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
323
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger−and−load carrying vehicle. Tow-
ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability
and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your
safety and the safety of others, you must
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyota
warranties do not apply to damage or
malfunction caused by towing a trailer for
commercial purposes. Ask your local
Toyota dealer for further details before
towing.
NOTICE
When towing a trailer, be sure to con-
sult your Toyota dealer for further in-
formation on additional requirements
such as a towing kit, etc.
WEIGHT LIMITS
Before towing, make sure the total trail-
er weight, gross combination weight,
gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight
and trailer tongue load are all within
the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load
can be measured with platform scales
found at a highway weighing station, build-
ing supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.
CAUTION
D The total trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo load) must
not exceed the following. Exceeding
this weight is dangerous.
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
680 kg (1500 lb.)
With towing package
1360 kg (3000 lb.)
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
907 kg (2000 lb.)
With towing package
1585 kg (3500 lb.)
If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-
ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is
necessary to use a sway control
device with sufficient capacity. The
gross combination weight (sum of
your vehicle weight plus its load
and the total trailer weight) must
not exceed the following.
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
3111 kg (6860 lb.)
With towing package
3790 kg (8360 lb.)
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
3338 kg (7360 lb.)
With towing package
4015 kg (8860 lb.)
Trailer towing
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
324
D Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-
ent weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though
the vehicle may be physically capa-
ble of towing a higher weight, the
operator must determine the maxi-
mum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating speci-
fied for the trailer hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in seri-
ous personal injuries.
D The gross vehicle weight must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross ve-
hicle weight is the sum of weights
of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.
D The load on either the front or rear
axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed
on the Certification Label.
Tongue load
Total trailer weight
100 = 9 to 11%
Total trailer weight Tongue load
D The trailer cargo load should be
distributed so that the tongue load
is 9 to 11% of the total trailer
weight, not exceed the following.
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
68 kg (150 lb.)
With towing package
136 kg (300 lb.)
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
90 kg (200 lb.)
With towing package
158 kg (350 lb.)
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
325
Never load the trailer with more
weight in the back than in the
front. About 60% of the trailer load
should be in the front half of the
trailer and the remaining 40% in the
rear.
HITCHES
D If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you
should consult with your Toyota dealer.
D Use only a hitch recommended by the
hitch manufacturer and the one which
conforms to the total trailer weight
requirement.
D The hitch must be bolted securely to
the vehicle frame and installed accord-
ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
D The hitch ball and king pin should have
a light coat of grease.
D Toyota recommends removing the trail-
er hitch whenever you are not towing
a trailer to reduce the possibility of
additional damage caused by the hitch
if your vehicle is struck from behind.
After removing the hitch, seal any
mounting holes in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of pollutants such as ex-
haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.
NOTICE
Do not use axle−mounted hitches as
they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or
tires.
BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS
D Toyota recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applica-
ble federal and state/provincial regu-
lations.
D A safety chain must always be used
between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes dam-
aged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.
CAUTION
D If the total trailer weight exceeds
453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
required.
D Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-
draulic system as it would lower its
braking effectiveness.
D Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
damage occurs to the coupling unit
or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer wandering over into another
lane.
TIRES
D Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are
properly inflated. See page 385 in Sec-
tion 7−2 and page 408 in Section 8 for
instructions.
D The trailer tires should be inflated to
the pressure recommended by the trail-
er manufacturer in respect to the total
trailer weight.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
326
TRAILER LIGHTS
D Your vehicle is equipped with a wire
harness stored in the rear end under
body. Some models are fitted with a
socket for trailer lights under the rear
bumper. Use either of them to connect
and operate the trailer lights. However,
the trailer lights must comply with fed-
eral, state/provincial and local regula-
tions. See your local recreational ve-
hicle dealer or rental agency for the
correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation
of the turn signals and stop lights each
time you hitch up. Direct splicing may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction of your lights.
BREAK−IN SCHEDULE
D Toyota recommends that you do not
tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
vehicle with any new power train com-
ponent (engine, transmission, differen-
tial, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first
800 km (500 miles) of driving.
MAINTENANCE
D If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will
require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. For this informa-
tion, please refer to the scheduled
maintenance information in the “Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.
D Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK
D Check that your vehicle remains level
when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down
condition, and check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.
D Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
loaded so that it cannot shift.
D Check that your rear view mirrors con-
form to any applicable federal, state/
provincial or local regulations. If not,
install the rear view mirrors required
for towing purposes.
TRAILER TOWING TIPS
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
handle differently than when not tow-
ing. The three main causes of vehicle−
trailer accidents are driver error, exces-
sive speed and improper trailer loading.
Keep these in mind when towing:
D Before starting out, check operation of
the lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-
tions. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and con-
nections. Before actually towing a trail-
er, practice turning, stopping and back-
ing with a trailer in an area away from
traffic until you learn the feel.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
327
D Backing with a trailer is difficult and
requires practice. Grip the bottom of
the steering wheel and move your hand
to the left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This pro-
cedure is generally opposite to that
when backing without a trailer.) Also,
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an acci-
dent.
D Because stopping distance may be in-
creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance
should be increased when towing a
trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and
trailer length between you and the ve-
hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.
D Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-
tion.
D Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.
The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
tight turn. Slow down before making a
turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
braking.
D Remember that when making a turn,
the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
making a larger than normal turning
radius with your vehicle.
D Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-
versely affect handling of your vehicle
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
to the rear from time to time to pre-
pare yourself for being passed by large
trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
straight ahead. If you make no extreme
correction with the steering or brakes,
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
D Be careful when passing other ve-
hicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer and
be sure you have plenty of room be-
fore changing lanes.
D In order to maintain engine braking effi-
ciency, do not use overdrive.
D Because of the added load of the trail-
er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” on page 336 in
Section 4.
D Always place wheel blocks under both
the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-
ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it
cannot be avoided, do so only after
performing the following:
1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-
der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
328
When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position,
start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply
your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
CAUTION
D Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or
the posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower. Because insta-
bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−
trailer combination usually in-
creases as the speed increases, ex-
ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control.
D Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden down-
shifts.
D Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking effi-
ciency.
Improving fuel economy is easy—just take
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:
D Keep your tires inflated at the cor-
rect pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page
385 in Section 7−2 for instructions.
D Do not carry unneeded weight in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.
D Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once
the engine is running smoothly, begin
driving—but gently. Remember, howev-
er, that on cold winter days this may
take a little longer.
D Keep the automatic transmission
overdrive turned on when engine
braking is not required. Driving with
the overdrive off will reduce the fuel
economy. (For details, see “Automatic
transmission” on page 145 in Section
1−7.)
D Accelerate slowly and smoothly.
Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high
gear as quickly as possible.
How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
329
D Avoid long engine idling. If you have
a long wait and you are not in traffic,
it is better to turn off the engine and
start again later.
D Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-
ving. Use a gear position suitable for
the road on which you are travelling.
D Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down. Stop−and−go driving
wastes fuel.
D Avoid unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-
tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-
den braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.
D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.
D Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal. This causes premature wear,
overheating and poor fuel economy.
D Maintain a moderate speed on high-
ways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel con-
sumption.
D Keep the front wheels in proper
alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corro-
sion.
D Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in
top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-
er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.
all lower engine performance and con-
tribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance informa-
tion, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-
al Supplement”.)
CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast
down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function with-
out the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is run-
ning.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
330
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
331
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your vehicle will not start 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your engine stalls while driving 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 354. . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 355. . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
332
Before making these checks, make sure
you have followed the correct starting pro-
cedure given in “How to start the engine”
on page 318 in Section 3 and that you
have sufficient fuel. If your vehicle is
equipped with the engine immobilizer sys-
tem, also check whether the other keys
will start the engine. If they work, your
key may be broken. Have the key
checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of
your keys work, there may be a malfunc-
tion in the immobilizer system. Call your
Toyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engine
immobilizer system)” on page 14 in Sec-
tion 1−2.)
If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly—
1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump start-
ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page
333 for further instructions.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.
NOTICE
Do not pull− or push−start the ve-
hicle. It may damage the vehicle or
cause a collision when the engine
starts. Also the three−way catalytic
converter may overheat and become a
fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal
speed but will not start—
1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or
“LOCK” and try starting the engine
again.
2. If the engine will not start, the engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
engine” on page 332 for further instruc-
tions.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
dealer or qualified repair shop.
If the engine will not start, your engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking.
If this happens, turn the key to “START”
with the accelerator pedal fully depressed.
Keep the key and accelerator pedal in
these positions for 15 seconds and re-
lease them. Then try starting the engine
with your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start after 15 se-
conds of cranking, release the key, wait
a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 se-
conds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.
If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
(b) Starting a flooded engine
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
333
To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might re-
sult from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent me-
chanic or towing service.
CAUTION
D Batteries contain sulfuric acid
which is poisonous and corrosive.
Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or ve-
hicle.
D If you should accidentally get acid
on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water im-
mediately. Then get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while en route to the medical
office.
D The gas normally produced by a
battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
are sure that the booster battery is
correct.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unneces-
sary lights and accessories.
When boosting, use the battery of
matching or higher quality. Any other
battery may be difficult to jump start
with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the
battery for several minutes.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batter-
ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting, run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
(c) Jump starting
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
334
Discharged
battery
Booster
battery
Positive
terminal
(“+” mark)
Jumper
cable
Positive
terminal (“+”mark)
4. Make the cable connections in the or-
der a, b, c, d.
a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the discharged battery.
b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery.
Jumper cable
Booster
battery
Discharged
battery
Negative
terminal (“−”mark)
c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)
terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable to
a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
The recommended connecting points
are shown in the following illustrations:
Connecting point for 2.4 L 4−cylinder
(2AZ−FE) engine
Connecting point for 3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE)
engine
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
335
Do not connect it to or near any part
that moves when the engine is
cranked.
CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch any-
thing except the correct battery termi-
nals or the ground.
5. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.
8. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked at your Toyota
dealer.
If the first start attempt is not success-
ful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper
cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery with the jumper cables connected
for several minutes and restart your en-
gine in the normal way.
If the another attempt is not successful,
the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-
ecked at your Toyota dealer.
If your engine stalls while driving...
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or
“LOCK”, and try starting the engine
again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your
vehicle will not start” on page 332 in this
Section.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the pow-
er assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.
If your engine stalls while
driving
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
336
If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the elec-
tronic throttle control system.
At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-
er, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erro-
neous pedal operation.
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, if you ex-
perience a loss of power, or if you hear
a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
engine has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...
1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-
hicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
and apply the parking brake. Turn off
the air conditioning if it is being used.
2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
opening the hood. If there is no coolant
boiling over or steam, leave the engine
running and make sure the electric
cooling fan is operating. If it is not,
turn the ignition off.
CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.
3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep
hands and clothing away from the
moving fan and engine drive belts.
4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-
gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer
for assistance.
5. If there are no obvious leaks, check
the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add
coolant to the reservoir while the en-
gine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” on page 383 in Section 7−2.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are
hot. Serious injury could result from
scalding hot fluid and steam blown
out under pressure.
If you cannot increase engine
speed
If your vehicle overheats
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
337
6. After the engine coolant temperature
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If neces-
sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-
ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.
1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place
well away from the traffic. Avoid
stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot
with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your
emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and
put the transmission in “P”.
4. Have everyone get out of the ve-
hicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions
thoroughly.
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe
the following to reduce the possi-
bility of personal injury:
D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle sup-
ported by the jack. Otherwise,
personal injury may occur.
D Do not start or run the engine
while your vehicle is supported
by the jack.
D Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking
brake and put the transmission
in “P”. Block the wheel diago-
nally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.
If you have a flat tire—
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
338
D Make sure to set the jack prop-
erly in the jack point. Raising
the vehicle with jack improper-
ly positioned will damage the
vehicle or may allow the ve-
hicle to fall off the jack and
cause personal injury.
D Never get under the vehicle
when the vehicle is supported
by the jack alone.
D Use the jack only for lifting
your vehicle during wheel
changing.
D Do not raise the vehicle with
someone in the vehicle.
D When raising the vehicle, do
not place any objects on top
of or underneath the jack.
D Raise the vehicle only high
enough to remove and change
the tire.
NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a
deflated tire. Driving even a
short distance can damage a
tire and wheel beyond repair.
1. Get the required tools and
spare tire.
1. Spare tire
2. Front towing eyelet
3. Jack handle
4. Wheel nut wrench
5. Adapter socket
6. Jack
To prepare yourself for an emergency,
you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools
and their storage locations.
—Required tools and spare
tire
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
339
Before removing the jack, remove the
right side deck board and unhook the
tightening strap.
After storing the jack, make sure it is
securely held by the tightening strap.
To remove the jack, rotate the jack
joint by hand until the jack becomes
free.
To store the jack, rotate the jack joint
until the jack is firmly secured.
This prevents the jack from flying for-
ward during a collision or sudden
stop.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
340
To detach the spare tire:
1. Vehicles with aluminium wheels—
Remove the inside spare tire cov-
er by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Pull the strap and open the center
deck board.
3. Vehicles with third seat—
If the third seat is upright, hang
the center deck board on the
right−side head restraint.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
341
4. Remove the cover as shown in the
illustration.
5. Put the adapter socket (for remov-
ing a spare tire) on the spare tire
clamp bolt.
6. Threading the jack handle through
the adapter socket, turn the jack
handle counterclockwise. Contin-
ue until the spare tire is lowered
completely to the ground.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
342
7. Pull out the spare tire and stand
it up against the bumper.
8. Remove the holding bracket.
Vehicles with aluminium wheels—
Remove the spare tire cover.
2. Block the wheel diagonally op-
posite the flat tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling when it is
jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a
wheel block in front of one of the front
wheels or behind one of the rear
wheels.
—Blocking the wheel
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
343
Type A
Type B
3. Remove the wheel ornament.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using the
beveled end of the wheel nut wrench
as shown.
CAUTION
Do not try to pull off the orna-
ment by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid
unexpected personal injury.
4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before
raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
to loosen. To get maximum leverage,
fit the wrench to the nut so that the
handle is on the right side, as shown
above. Grab the wrench near the end
of the handle and pull up on the han-
dle. Be careful that the wrench does
not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-
screw them about one−half turn.
—Removing wheel ornament —Loosening wheel nuts
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
344
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose
and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious ac-
cident.
5. Position the jack at the correct
jack point as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.
6. After making sure that no one
is in the vehicle, raise it high
enough so that the spare tire
can be installed.
Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare
tire than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle into the jack (it is a loose fit)
and turn it clockwise. As the jack
touches the vehicle and begins to lift,
double−check that it is properly posi-
tioned.
—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
345
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.
7. Remove the wheel nuts and
change tires.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the
bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get
at least the top bolt started through
its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
back over the other bolts.
Before putting on wheels, remove any
corrosion on the mounting surfaces
with a wire brush or such. Installation
of wheels without good metal−to−met-
al contact at the mounting surface can
cause wheel nuts to loosen and
eventually cause a wheel to come off
while driving.
—Changing wheels
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
346
8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-
ger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end
inward) and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press back on the
tire back and see if you can tighten
them more.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loose and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a seri-
ous accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.
9. Lower the vehicle completely
and tighten the wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclock-
wise to lower the vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and
turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any addition-
al leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Make sure the wrench is securely en-
gaged over the nut.
—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
347
Tighten each nut a little at a time in
the order shown. Repeat the process
until all the nuts are tight.
CAUTION
D When lowering the vehicle,
make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons
around will not be injured as
the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.
D Have the wheel nuts tightened
with torque wrench to 103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon
as possible after changing
wheels. Otherwise, the nuts
may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.
Type A
Type B
10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.
1. Put the wheel ornament into posi-
tion.
2. Then tap it firmly with the side or
heel of your hand to snap it into
place.
CAUTION
D Take due care in handling the
ornament to avoid unexpected
personal injury.
D Do not attach a heavily dam-
aged plastic wheel ornament.
It may fly off the wheel and
cause accidents while the ve-
hicle is moving.
—Reinstalling wheel ornament
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
348
11.Check the air pressure of the re-
placed tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-
cation designated on page 408 in
Section 8. If the pressure is lower,
drive slowly to the nearest service
station and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-
tion valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and
possibly cause air leakage. If the cap
is missing, have a new one put on as
soon as possible.
12.Restow all the tools, jack and
flat tire securely.
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified on page 408 in Sec-
tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have a
technician repair the flat tire and re-
place the spare tire with it.
Initial adjustment of the tire pres-
sure warning system is necessary
after you have replaced your tires
or wheels. See “Tire pressure
warning system” on page 159 in
Section 1−7.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools, jack and flat tire are se-
curely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility
of personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden braking.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward.
Two−wheel drive models—
Turn off the traction control system to
become unstuck to allow the tires to
spin enough to remove the vehicle from
the obstruction. (For details, see “Trac-
tion control system (two−wheel drive
models)” on page 154 in Section 1−7.)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and back-
ward if people or objects are any-
where near the vehicle. During the
rocking operation the vehicle may
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or ob-
jects.
—After changing wheels If your vehicle becomes stuck
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
349
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent dam-
age to the transmission and other
parts.
z Do not depress the accelerator ped-
al while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is com-
pletely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
z Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
z If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as tow-
ing.
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
—From front
—From rear
(b) Using flat bed truck
Two−wheel drive models
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
—From front
—From rear
(b) Using flat bed truck
Four−wheel drive models
If your vehicle needs to be
towed—
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
350
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-
vice. In consultation with them, have
your vehicle towed using either (a) or
(b).
Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or com-
mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-
hicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in “—Emergency tow-
ing” on page 351 in this Section.
Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following pre-
cautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.
Two−wheel drive models—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front—Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
When lifting wheels, take care to en-
sure adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the
raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper
and/or underbody of the towed vehicle
will be damaged during towing.
From rear—
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the rear
with the front wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to
the transmission.
(b) Using flat bed truck
Four−wheel drive models—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
Use a towing dolly under the wheels not
lifted by the truck.
(b) Using flat bed truck
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
351
(c) Towing with sling
type truck
All models—
(c) Towing with sling type truck
NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-
ther from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-
vice.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-
rarily towed by a cable or chain se-
cured to one of the emergency towing
eyelets on the front of the vehicle. Use
extreme caution when towing the ve-
hicle.
To install the front towing eyelet, see
“—Installing front towing eyelet” on page
352 in this Section.
NOTICE
z Only use specified towing eyelet;
otherwise your vehicle may be dam-
aged.
z Never tow a vehicle from the rear
with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to
the transmission.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing ve-
hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would place
excessive stress on the emergency
towing eyelet and towing cable or
chain. The eyelet and towing cable or
chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.
—Emergency towing
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
352
NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing eyelet provided.
Before towing, release the parking brake
and put the transmission in “N”. The key
must be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON”
(engine running).
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the pow-
er assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.
1. Remove the front towing eyelet cover
on the front bumper by pushing the
outside of the cover.
2. Use the front towing eyelet in the lug-
gage compartment. Secure it to the
hole on the bumper by turning clock-
wise. (For the towing eyelet location,
see “—Required tools and spare tire”
on page 338 in this Section.)
—Installing front towing eyelet
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
353
3. Tighten the front towing eyelet securely
by a wheel nut wrench.
CAUTION
When installing the eyelet on the ve-
hicle, be sure to tighten the front
eyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose,
it may come off when being towed
and result in death or serious injury.
D Before emergency towing, check that
the eyelet is not broken or damaged
and that the installation bolts are not
loose.
D Fasten the towing cable or chain se-
curely to the eyelet.
D Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady
and even force.
D To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
If the emergency towing eyelet is
used to get out when your vehicle
becomes struck in mud, sand or oth-
er condition from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power, make sure to observe the pre-
cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,
excessive stress will be put on the
eyelet and the towing cable or chain
may break, causing serious injury or
damage.
D If the towing vehicle can hardly
move, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
for assistance.
D Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
D Keep away from the vehicle during
towing.
—Emergency towing eyelet
precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
354
The following methods are effective to get
out when your vehicle is struck in mud,
sand or other condition from which the
vehicle cannot be driven out under its own
power. Use extreme caution when towing
vehicles. In addition, keep away from the
vehicles and towing cable or chain when
towing.
D Remove the soil and sand in the front
and the back of the tires.
D Place a stone or wood under the tires.
If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of the “P” position to other posi-
tions even though the brake pedal is
depressed, use the shift lock override
button as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position. Make sure the parking
brake is applied.
2. Pry up the cover with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
3. Insert your finger into the hole to
push down the shift lock override
button. You can shift out of the “P”
position only while pushing the but-
ton.
4. Shift into the “N” position.
5. Insert the cover.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
keep the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
—Tips for towing a stuck
vehicle
If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
355
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number. If your vehicle is equipped
with the engine immobilizer system, the
dealer will also need your master key.
Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—
Even if you lose only one key, contact
your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If
you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobi-
lizer system must be replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on
page 14 in Section 1−2.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window be-
cause it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.
You can purchase a new wireless re-
mote control transmitter at your Toyota
dealer.
Have the registered identification numbers
of your transmitters deleted from your ve-
hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to avoid the possibility of theft or
an accident. Then, have the identification
number of your new transmitter registered.
At the same time, you must bring all of
the remaining transmitters to have them
registered again as well.
You can use the wireless remote control
system with the new transmitter. Contact
your Toyota dealer for detailed information.
If you lose your keys
If you lose your wireless
remote control transmitter
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
356
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
357
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion prevention and appearance care
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing and waxing your Toyota 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
358
Toyota, through the diligent research, de-
sign and use of the most advanced
technology available, helps prevent corro-
sion and provides you with the finest qual-
ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
ensure long−term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:
D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under
the vehicle.
D Chipping of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.
Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your ve-
hicle under certain environmental condi-
tions:
D Road salt or dust control chemicals will
accelerate corrosion, as will the pres-
ence of salt in the air near the sea−
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.
D High humidity accelerates corrosion es-
pecially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.
D Wetness or dampness to certain parts
of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.
D High ambient temperatures can cause
corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation.
The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any dam-
age to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.
To help prevent corrosion on your
Toyota, follow these guidelines:
Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:
D If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize cor-
rosion.
D High pressure water or steam is effec-
tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to simply wet the
mud and debris without removing. The
lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
as trapped water in these areas can
cause corrosion.
D Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-
oughly when winter is over.
See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
page 359 for more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up im-
mediately to prevent corrosion from start-
ing. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.
Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
359
Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-
ter and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-
casionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly care-
ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-
ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size
shields, which come as near to the ground
as possible, are the best. We recommend
that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
happy to assist in supplying and installing
the shields if they are recommended for
your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-
lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
water or snow, your garage may be so
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-
rode if the ventilation is poor.
Washing your Toyota
Keep your vehicle clean by regular
washing.
The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-
sible.
D When driving in a coastal area
D When driving on a road sprinkled with
antifreeze
D When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,
bird droppings and carcass of an insect
D When driving in areas where there is
a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or
chemical substances
D When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud
Hand−washing your Toyota
Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not warm to the touch.
CAUTION
When cleaning under floor or chassis,
be careful not to injure your hands.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-
move any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or the wheel
wells.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
the soap and water remove the dirt.
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−
pressure car wash, for example) at or
near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
door opened. If the water enters the air
vent, you may experience trouble with re-
fueling or rough engine idling.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic sub-
stances splash an ornament, be sure to
wash them off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.
Washing and waxing your
Toyota
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
360
Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use
organic substances or scrub them with a
hard brush. This may damage the sur-
faces of the lights.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.
3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hard—you might scratch
the paint.
NOTICE
z Do not use organic substances
(gasoline, kerosene, benzine or
strong solvents), which may be tox-
ic or cause damage.
z Do not scrub any part of the ve-
hicle with a hard brush, which may
cause damage.
Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-
matic car wash, but remember that the
paint can be scratched by some type of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the
washing process itself. Scratching reduces
paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car
wash should be able to advise you wheth-
er the process is safe for the paint on
your vehicle.
NOTICE
With mast type antenna:
To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure it is removed before driv-
ing your Toyota through an automatic
car wash.
Waxing your Toyota
Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.
Once a month or if the vehicle surface
does not repel water well, apply wax.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-
fore you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weath-
ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-
lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure
that the nozzles do not become blocked
when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to
have the vehicle serviced.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
361
Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the
surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause
damage to the lenses. If you accidentally
put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or
wash it off.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the sur-
face in large patches.
NOTICE
Always remove the plastic bumpers if
your vehicle is re−painted and placed
in a high heat paint waxing booth.
High temperatures could damage the
bumpers.
CAUTION
D Vehicles with side airbags and cur-
tain shield airbags:
Be careful not to splash water or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
prevent the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag from activating cor-
rectly, resulting in serious injury.
D Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water, or allow water to get onto
the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other
electrical components above or un-
der the floor carpet (or mat) and
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.
Vinyl interior
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to re-
move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-
peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−
type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.
Cleaning the interior
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
362
Carpets
Use a good foam−type shampoo to
clean the carpets.
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to pro-
duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.
Do not apply water—the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.
Seat belts
The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-
ing, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.
NOTICE
z Do not use dye or bleach on the
belts—it may weaken them.
z Do not use the belts until they be-
come dry.
Windows
The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connec-
tors.
Air conditioning control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, console panel,
and switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-
warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.
NOTICE
z Do not use organic substances (sol-
vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discol-
oring, staining or peeling of the
surface.
z If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances men-
tioned above.
z If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not apply the liquid onto the ve-
hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-
tain the ingredients mentioned
above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.
Leather interior
The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.
After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-
lated shaded area.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
363
NOTICE
z If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
z Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for clean-
ing the leather as these could
cause discoloring.
z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.
z Mildew may develop on soiled leath-
er upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
z Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your ve-
hicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.
z The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
z Improper cleaning of the leather up-
holstery could result in discolor-
ation or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
364
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
365
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Vehicle maintenance and care
Maintenance requirements 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 370. . . . . . . . .
For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
SECTION 6
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
366
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with long-
er service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular mainte-
nance, as well as day−to−day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical
drivings.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and emis-
sion control system warranties specify that
proper maintenance and care must be per-
formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment” for complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−
to−day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.
Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those
required to be serviced at regular inter-
vals.
For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the
repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied.
The owner may elect to use non−Toyot a
supplied parts for replacement pur-
poses without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effec-
tiveness of the emission control sys-
tems.
You may also elect to have mainte-
nance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair es-
tablishment or individual without invali-
dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-
ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for complete war-
ranty information.
Where to go for service?
Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-
cialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance require-
ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-
nomically.
Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been per-
formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-
lems should arise with your vehicle while
under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechani-
cal ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to per-
form them are presented on page 371 in
Section 7.
Maintenance requirements
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
367
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-
ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-
mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-
self maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment” for the details.
Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as fre-
quently as specified. In addition to check-
ing the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-
fied service shop immediately. It is recom-
mended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.
CAUTION
Make these checks only with ade-
quate ventilation if you run the en-
gine.
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See page 397 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the see−through
reservoir when the engine is cold. See
page 382 in Section 7−2 for additional
information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked with
leaves, dirt or insects. See page 383 in
Section 7−2 for additional information.
Battery condition
Check the battery condition by the indica-
tor color. See page 394 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 384 in Section 7−2 for addition-
al information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on a level spot. See page 380 in Section
7−2 for additional information.
General maintenance
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
368
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See page 384 in Section 7−2 for addition-
al information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immedi-
ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on
page 295 in Section 2.)
INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified free play.
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all seat controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate
smoothly and that all latches lock securely
in any position. Check that the head re-
straints move up and down smoothly and
that the locks hold securely in any latched
position. For folding−down rear seatbacks,
check that the latches lock securely.
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as
buckles, retractors and anchors operate
properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-
aged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.
Brakes
In a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.
Parking brake
Check that the pedal has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.
Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-
nism
Check the lock release button of the se-
lector lever for proper and smooth opera-
tion. On a safe incline, check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector
lever in “P” position and all brakes re-
leased.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-
ter or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.
Doors and engine hood
Check that all side doors and back door
operate smoothly and all latches lock se-
curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-
ondary latch secures the hood from open-
ing when the primary latch is released.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
369
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge ev-
ery two weeks, or at least once a
month. See page 385 in Section 7−2
for additional information.
Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts,
damage or excessive wear. See page
387 in Section 7−2 for additional in-
formation. When checking the tires,
make sure no nuts are missing, and
check the nuts for looseness. Tighten
them if necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the
maintenance schedule. (For sched-
uled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment”.) See page 389 in Section 7−2
for additional information.
Be on the alert for changes in perfor-
mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
indicate service is needed. Some impor-
tant clues are as follows:
D Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
D Appreciable loss of power
D Strange engine noises
D A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-
ter dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)
D Change in exhaust sound (This may
indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked im-
mediately.)
D Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear
D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road
D Strange noises related to suspension
movement
D Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
feeling brake pedal; pedal almost
touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side
when braking
D Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the ve-
hicle unchecked. It could result in se-
rious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.
Does your vehicle need
repairing?
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
370
Some states have vehicle emission in-
spection programs which include OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation
of the emission control system. When the
OBD system determines that a problem
exists somewhere in the emission control
system, the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp
does not come on, your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test as readiness codes
have not been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary mal-
function such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips, but the
error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
even the malfunction indicator lamp does
not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
371
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 7− 1
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
372
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine oil level dipstick
5. Fuse blocks
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Electric cooling fans
11. Windshield and rear window washer
fluid tank
Engine compartment overview
"2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
373
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil level dipstick
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Fuse blocks
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Electric cooling fans
11. Windshield and rear window washer
fluid tank
"3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
374
Spare fuses
With daytime running light system
Fuse locations
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
375
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or in-
complete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing do−it−yourself maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 377 in this Section.
Utmost care should be taken when work-
ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental
injury. Here are a few precautions that
you should be especially careful to ob-
serve:
CAUTION
D When the engine is running, keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive belts. (Removing rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)
D Right after driving, the engine
compartment—the engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold, power steering
fluid reservoir and spark plug
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-
ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.
D If the engine is hot, do not remove
the radiator cap or loosen the drain
plugs to prevent burning yourself.
D Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper or rags,
in the engine compartment.
D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-
low open flames around fuel or the
battery. Their fumes are flammable.
D Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Al-
ways use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.
D Be sure that the ignition is off if
you work near the electric cooling
fans or radiator grille. With the
ignition on, the electric cooling fans
will automatically start to run if the
engine coolant temperature is high
and/or the air conditioning is on.
D Use eye protection whenever you
work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
D Used engine oil contains potentially
harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as in-
flammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To re-
move used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.
D Do not leave used oil within the
reach of children.
D Dispose of used oil and filter only
in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and fil-
ter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer or
a service station for information
concerning recycling or disposal.
Do−it−yourself service
precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
376
D Be extremely cautious when work-
ing on the battery. It contains poi-
sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
NOTICE
z Remember that battery and ignition
cable carry high currents or volt-
ages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
z Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality eth-
ylene glycol based non−silicate,
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-
rate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-
ant and 50% deionized water (for
the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water (for Canada).
z If you spill some of the coolant, be
sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging the parts
or paint.
z Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plug holes.
z Use only spark plugs of the speci-
fied type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of per-
formance or radio noise.
z Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.
z Do not overfill automatic transmis-
sion fluid and power steering fluid,
or the transmission and power
steering could be damaged.
z Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
z Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
z When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not for-
gotten any tools, rags, etc.
Front
Rear (two−wheel drive models)
Positioning the jack
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
377
Rear (four−wheel drive models)
When jacking up your vehicle with the
jack, position the jack correctly as
shown in the illustrations.
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the
following to reduce the possibility of
personal injury:
D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your body
under the vehicle supported by the
jack. Personal injury may occur.
D Do not start or run the engine while
your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
D Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking brake
and put the transmission in “P”.
Block the wheels on the opposite
side of the jack up point if neces-
sary.
D Make sure to set the jack properly
in the jack point. Raising the ve-
hicle with jack improperly posi-
tioned will damage the vehicle or
may allow the vehicle to fall off the
jack and cause personal injury.
D Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the jack
alone; use vehicle support stands.
D Do not raise the vehicle with some-
one in the vehicle.
D When raising the vehicle, do not
place any objects on top of or un-
derneath the jack.
NOTICE
Make sure to place the jack correctly,
or your vehicle may be damaged.
Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need to perform do−it−yourself mainte-
nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-
signed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Parts (if level is low):
D “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-
lent
See page 380 in Section 7−2 for de-
tails about engine oil selection.
Tools:
D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding oil)
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Parts (if level is low):
D “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or
similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-
trite, and non−borate coolant with long−
life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-
ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%
coolant and 45% deionized water (for
Canada).
Parts and tools
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
378
Tools:
D Funnel (only for adding coolant)
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
Parts (if level is low):
D SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
brake fluid
Tools:
D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID
Parts (if level is low):
D Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONrII or III
Tools:
D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Tools:
D Warm water
D Baking soda
D Grease
D Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
D Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:
D Water
D Washer fluid containing antifreeze
(for winter use)
Tools:
D Funnel
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:
D Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original (See charts in
“Replacing light bulbs” on page 398 in
Section 7−3.)
Tools:
D Screwdriver
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
379
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid 384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid 384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 7− 2
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
380
Low level Full level
Add oil O.K. Too full
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Low level Full level
Add oil O.K. Too full
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
With the engine at operating tempera-
ture and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle
should be on level ground. After turning
off the engine, wait a few minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under
the end and wipe it clean.
3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
end.
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the hot ex-
haust manifold.
NOTICE
z Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.
z To avoid drops of the engine oil
falling when you pull out the engine
oil dipstick, make sure to hold a
rag under the dipstick.
If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding oil.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the
dipstick is indicated as follows:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
1.0L(1.1qt.,0.9lmp.qt.)
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
1.5L(1.6qt.,1.3lmp.qt.)
For the engine oil capacity, see “Service
specifications” on page 405 in Section 8.
When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.
Checking the engine oil level
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
381
NOTICE
z Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.
z Avoid overfilling, or the engine
could be damaged.
z Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.
ENGINE OIL SELECTION
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W−30
Outside temperature
SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good
fuel economy and good starting in cold
weather.
If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE
10W−30 may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at
the next oil change.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
382
Oil identification mark
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-
dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-
fication Mark is added to some oil con-
tainers to help you select the oil you
should use.
To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-
mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.
Look at the see−through coolant reser-
voir when the engine is cold. The cool-
ant level is satisfactory if it is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.
If the level is low, add the coolant. (For
the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with engine temperature. However, if the
level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.
If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
cock and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the radiator cap when the en-
gine is hot.
Checking the engine coolant
level
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
383
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your engine cooling system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with long−life hybrid organic acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant pro-
vides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant pro-
vides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine
coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated
with long−life hybrid organic acid
technology and has been specifically
designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Toyota vehicles.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.
If either of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condi-
tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be care-
ful not to touch the radiator or con-
denser when the engine is hot.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator
and condenser, do not perform the
work by yourself.
Checking the radiator and
condenser
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
384
To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear. So
be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical prob-
lem.
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by
hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted
line. This brings the fluid to the correct
level when you put the cap back on.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.
CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
hands or in your eyes, flush the af-
fected area with clean water immedi-
ately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your hands or eyes, go to the
doctor.
NOTICE
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure
to wipe it off to prevent it from dam-
aging the parts or paintwork.
Open
If hot O.K.
If hot add
If cold add
If cold O.K.
Close
Check the fluid level through the reser-
voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-
mission fluid DEXRONrII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
hot (80_C or 175_F). You may also check
the level when the fluid is cold (about
room temperature, 10_C—30_C or
50_F—85_F) if the engine has not been
run for about five hours.
Checking brake fluid Checking power steering fluid
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
385
Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-
ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. If
the fluid is cold, the level should be in the
“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the
fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.
If the level is at the low side of either
range, add automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONrII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-
terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-
voir cap, visually check the steering box
case, vane pump and hose connections
for leaks or damage.
CAUTION
The reservoir tank may be hot so be
careful not to burn yourself.
NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-
ing could be damaged.
Keep your tire inflation pressures
at the proper level.
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressures, tire sizes and the com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
(vehicle capacity weight) are de-
scribed on page 404 and 408. They
are also on the tire and loading infor-
mation label.
You should check the tire inflation
pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. And do not forget the
spare!
Checking tire inflation
pressure
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
386
The following instructions for
checking tire inflation pressure
should be observed:
D The pressure should be
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours and has
not been driven for more than 1.5
km or 1 mile since, you will get
an accurate cold tire inflation pres-
sure reading.
D Always use a tire pressure
gauge. The appearance of a tire
can be misleading. Besides, tire
inflation pressures that are even
just a few pounds off can degrade
ride and handling.
D Do not bleed or reduce tire
inflation pressure after driving.
It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
D Never exceed the vehicle capac-
ity weight. Passenger and lug-
gage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.
Tire pressure gauge
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure
gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using the grad-
uations of the gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure
is not within the prescribed range,
insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too
much air, press the center of the
valve and release the air to adjust.
5. After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and ad-
justment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not avail-
able, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt
or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage.
If the caps have been lost, have
new ones put on as soon as pos-
sible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may
waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-
ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-
hicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota deal-
er.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
387
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following condi-
tions may occur and cause an ac-
cident resulting in death or seri-
ous injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinfla-
tion)—
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D Poor handling
D Possibility of blowouts from an
overheated tire
D Poor sealing of the tire bead
D Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards
High tire pressure (overinfla-
tion)—
D Poor handling
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards
Tread wear indicator
CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire’s tread for tread
wear indicators. If the indicators
show, replace the tires. The loca-
tion of tread wear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “∆” marks,
etc., molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Checking and replacing tires
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
388
The tires on your Toyota have built−in
tread wear indicators to help you
know when the tires need replace-
ment. When the tread depth wears to
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-
tors will appear. If you can see the
indicators in two or more adjacent
grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The lower the tread, the higher the
risk of skidding.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below
4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indi-
cating internal damage, the tire
should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
If air loss occurs while driving, do not
continue driving. Driving even a short
distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years
old must be checked by a qualified
technician even if damage is not
obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This applies also to the spare tire and
tires stored for future use.
REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use a tire of
the same size and construction,
and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed
tires. Also, on four−wheel drive
models, all the tires must be the
same brand and have the same
tread patterns.
Using any other size or type of tire
may seriously affect handling, ride,
speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance be-
tween the body and tires or snow
chains.
Check that the maximum load of the
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)
of either the front axle or the rear
axle, whichever is greater. As for the
maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-
tification Label.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
389
For details about the side wall of the
tire and the Certification Label, see
pages 301 and 304.
CAUTION
Observe the following instruc-
tions. Otherwise, an accident
may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
D Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias−ply tires on your ve-
hicle, as this may cause dan-
gerous handling characteris-
tics resulting in loss of control.
D Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended
size, as this may cause danger-
ous handling characteristics
resulting in loss of control.
D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or
tread patterns, as this may
cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
Toyota recommends all four tires,
or at least both of the front or rear
tires be replaced at a time as a set.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
337 in Section 4 for tire change proce-
dure.
When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.
An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-
hicle handling and tire life. Wheels
can get out of balance with regular
use and should therefore be balanced
occasionally.
When replacing a tubeless tire, the
air valve should also be replaced
with a new one.
To equalize tire wear and help ex-
tend tire life, Toyota recommends
that you rotate your tires accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance infor-
mation, please refer to the “Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-
er’s Manual Supplement”.)
However, the most appropriate tim-
ing for tire rotation may vary ac-
cording to your driving habits and
road surface conditions.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
337 in Section 4 for tire change proce-
dure.
Rotating tires
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
390
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out−
of−balance wheels, or severe braking.
Initial adjustment of the tire pres-
sure warning system is necessary
after you have rotated your tires.
See “Tire pressure warning sys-
tem” on page 159 in Section 1−7.
WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR
CHAINS
Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.
SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
Also, on four−wheel drive models, all
the tires must be the same brand and
have the same tread patterns.
Do not use tires other than those men-
tioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur re-
sulting in death or serious injuries.
D Do not use snow tires other than
the manufacturer’s recommended si-
ze, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use snow tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or tread
patterns, as this may cause danger-
ous handling characteristics result-
ing in loss of control.
SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
Installing snow tires on the front wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires, which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
When storing removed tires, you should
store them in a cool dry place.
Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing.
CAUTION
D Do not drive with the snow tires
incorrectly inflated.
D Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
with any type of snow tires.
Installing snow tires and
chains
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
391
Side chain
Cross chain
TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
Use the tire chains of correct size.
Use the following type chains.
mm (in.)
A Diameter of side chain 3 (0.12)
B Width of side chain 10 (0.39)
C Length of side chain 30 (1.18)
D Diameter of cross chain 4 (0.16)
E Width of cross chain 14 (0.55)
F Length of cross chain 25 (0.98)
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check them
before installing chains.
NOTICE
If the wrong combination of tire and
chain is used, the chains could dam-
age the vehicle body.
CHAIN INSTALLATION
Install the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the rear tires. Retighten
chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km
(1/4—1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, care-
fully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.
If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.
CAUTION
D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or
the chain manufacturer’s recom-
mended speed limit, whichever is
lower.
D Drive carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.
D Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel
braking, as use of chains may ad-
versely affect vehicle handling.
D When driving with chains installed,
be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
392
WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS
If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
loss of handling control.
WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are re-
placed by ones with the same load ca-
pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-
ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-
eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-
ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.
Replacement with used wheels is not rec-
ommended as they may have been sub-
jected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur re-
sulting in death or serious injuries.
D Do not use wheels other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size,
as this may cause dangerous han-
dling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use wheels of different
brands, sizes and types, as this
may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control.
D When installing aluminum wheels,
check that the wheel nuts are tight
after driving your vehicle the first 1600
km (1000 miles).
D If you have rotated, repaired, or
changed your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving
1600 km (1000 miles).
D When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.
D Use only Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for your aluminum
wheels.
D When balancing your wheels, use only
Toyota balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer.
D As with any wheel, periodically check
your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.
Replacing wheels Aluminum wheel precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
393
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 7− 3
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
394
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and
explosive hydrogen gas.
D Do not cause a spark from the bat-
tery with tools.
D Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.
D Never ingest electrolyte.
D Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the battery.
D Keep children away from the bat-
tery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
D If electrolyte gets in your eyes,
flush your eyes with clean water
immediately and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, con-
tinue to apply water with a sponge
or cloth while en route to the medi-
cal office.
D If electrolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burning, get medi-
cal attention immediately.
D If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
there is a possibility of its soaking
through to your skin, so immediate-
ly take off the exposed clothing and
follow the procedure above, if nec-
essary.
D If you accidentally swallow electro-
lyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magne-
sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emer-
gency help.
Hold−down clamp
Terminals Ground cable
Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold−down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and bak-
ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-
nals with grease to prevent further cor-
rosion.
b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
overtighten.
c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.
Checking battery condition—
—Precautions
—Checking battery exterior
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
395
NOTICE
z Be sure the engine and all accesso-
ries are off before performing main-
tenance.
z When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (“−” mark) first and rein-
stall it last.
z Be careful not to cause a short cir-
cuit with tools.
z Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.
Type A
Green Dark
Clear or
light yellow
Type B
Blue White Red
CHECKING BY INDICATOR
Check the battery condition by the indi-
cator color.
Indicator color
Condition
Type A Type B
Green Blue Good
Dark White
Charging necessary.
Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.
Clear or
light
yellow
Red
Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.
During recharging, the battery is pro-
ducing hydrogen gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
2. Be sure the power switch on the re-
charger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.
CAUTION
D Always charge the battery in an un-
confined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventila-
tion.
D Only do a slow charge (5 A or
less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may ex-
plode, causing personal injuries.
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
396
Good Blown
Type A
Good Blown
Type B
Good Blown
Type C
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
See “Fuse locations” on page 374 in Sec-
tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative
component off. Pull the suspected fuse
straight out and check it.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
page 409 in Section 8 for the functions
controlled by each circuit.
Checking and replacing fuses
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
397
Type A fuses can be pulled out by using
the pull−out tool. The location of the pull−
out tool is shown in the illustration.
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-
ing designated on the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “FR DEF”
or “CIG” fuse, which may be dispensable
for normal driving, and use it if its amper-
age rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amper-
age, use one that is lower, but as close
to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.
It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your ve-
hicle for emergencies.
If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical sys-
tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher am-
perage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause ex-
tensive damage and possibly a fire.
If any washer does not work or the low
windshield washer fluid level warning
light comes on, the washer tank may be
empty. Add washer fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where tempera-
tures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.
Adding washer fluid
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
398
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may dam-
age your vehicle’s paint.
The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.
CAUTION
D To prevent burning yourself, do not
replace the light bulbs while they
are hot.
D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if
there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.
Replacing light bulbs—
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
399
Light bulbs
Bulb
No.
W Type
Headlights (low) 9006
51
A
Headlights (high) 9005 60 B
Front fog lights 9006 51 A
Front turn signals/
parking and front
side marker lights
— 21/5 C
Rear side marker
lights
168 5 E
Rear turn signal
lights
— 21 D
Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 E
Back−up lights 7440 21 E
High mounted stop
light
921 16 E
License plate
lights
— 5 E
Interior lights — 8 F
Personal lights — 5 E
Vanity lights — 2 F
Door courtesy
lights
— 5 E
Glove box light #74 1.2 E
A: HB4 halogen bulbs
B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: Single end bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
F: Double end bulbs
1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb base
counterclockwise to the front of the
vehicle as shown.
—Headlights
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
400
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb base
and install a new bulb.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.
3. Insert the bulb base into the mount-
ing hole by turning it clockwise.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.
If any of the following lights burns out,
contact your Toyota dealer.
D Front fog lights
D Front turn signals/parking and front
side marker lights
D Rear side marker lights
NOTICE
Do not try to replace any of the light
bulbs mentioned above by yourself.
You may damage the vehicle.
—Front fog, front turn signal/
parking and front side marker,
and rear side marker lights
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
401
a: Stop/tail light
b: Rear turn signal light
c: Stop/tail light
d: Back−up light
—Rear turn signal, stop/tail
and back−up lights
—High mounted stoplight
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
402
Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.
—License plate light
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
403
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Dimensions and weights 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel 405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications 405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 8
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
404
Model:
2AZ−FE and 3MZ−FE
Type:
2AZ−FE engine
4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
3MZ−FE engine
6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke, mm (in.):
2AZ−FE engine
88.5 96.0 (3.48 3.78)
3MZ−FE engine
92.0 83.0 (3.62 3.27)
Displacement, cm
3
(cu. in.):
2AZ−FE engine
2362 (144.1)
3MZ−FE engine
3311 (202.1)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length mm (in.)
Overall width mm (in.)
Overall height
∗
1
mm (in.)
Wheelbase mm (in.)
Front tread mm (in.)
Rear tread mm (in.)
Vehicle capacity
weight (occupants
+ luggage) kg (lb.)
Two−wheel drive models Four−wheel drive models
4690 (184.6)
4690 (184.6)
1825 (71.9) 1825 (71.9)
1690 (66.5)
∗
2
1745 (68.7)
∗
3
2715 (106.9) 2715 (106.9)
1580 (62.2) 1575 (62.0)
1565 (61.6) 1555 (61.2)
390 (860)
∗
4
526 (1159)
∗
5
390 (860)
∗
4
526 (1159)
∗
5
∗
1
: Unladen vehicle
∗
2
: Without roof rails
∗
3
: With roof rails
∗
4
: Without third seat
∗
5
: With third seat
∗
6
: 2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
∗
7
: 3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
∗
8
: Without towing package
∗
9
: With towing package
1680 (66.1)
∗
2
1735 (68.3)
∗
3
Towing capacity
(trailer weight +
cargo weight) kg (lb.)
680 (1500)
∗
6, 8
1360 (3000)
∗
6, 9
907 (2000)
∗
7, 8
1585 (3500)
∗
7, 9
680 (1500)
∗
6, 8
1360 (3000)
∗
6, 9
907 (2000)
∗
7, 8
1585 (3500)
∗
7, 9
Engine
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
405
Fuel type:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. For improved vehicle perfor-
mance, use premium unleaded gaso-
line with an Octane Rating of 91 (Re-
search Octane Number 96) or higher.
Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
72.5 (19.1, 16.0)
ENGINE
Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Intake 0.19—0.29 (0.007—0.011)
Exhaust 0.30—0.40 (0.012—0.016)
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)
Spark plug type:
DENSO SK20R11
NGK IFR6A11
Spark plug gap, mm(in.):
1.1 (0.043)
Drive belt tension measured with
Borroughs drive belt tension gauge
No.BT−33−73F (used belt), Ibf:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Automatic adjustment
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
125"10
ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.
qt.):
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
With filter 3.8 (4.0, 3.3)
Without filter 3.6 (3.8, 3.2)
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
With filter 4.7 (5.0, 4.1)
Without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Fuel Service specifications
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
406
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 5W−30
Outside temperature
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details.
COOLING SYSTEM
Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
With rear heater 7.7 (8.1, 6.8)
8.5 (9.0, 7.5)
∗
Without rear heater
6.3 (6.7, 5.5)
7.1 (7.5, 6.2)
∗
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine
With rear heater 10.7 (11.3, 9.4)
11.4 (12.0, 10.0)
∗
Without rear heater
9.4 (9.9, 8.3)
10.1 (10.7, 8.9)
∗
∗
: Vehicles with towing package
Coolant type:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
used in your Toyota vehicle at factory
fill. In order to avoid technical problems,
only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology.
(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.
BATTERY
Open voltage
∗
at 20_C (68_F):
12.6—12.8V Fully charged
12.2—12.4V Half charged
11.8—12.0V Discharged
∗
: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-
ter the key is removed with all the lights
turned off
Charging rates:
5 A max.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Fluid capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp. qt.):
Up to 3.5 (3.7, 3.1)
Fluid type:
Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV
Change automatic transmission fluid only
as necessary.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
407
Generally, it is necessary to change
automatic transmission fluid only if your
vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When
changing the automatic transmission fluid,
use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV”
(ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in
assuring optimum transaxle performance.
Notice: Using automatic transmission
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type T −IV” may cause deterioration in
shift quality, locking up of your trans-
mission accompanied by vibration, and
ultimately damage the automatic trans-
mission of your vehicle.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details.
TRANSFER
(four−wheel drive models)
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
0.9 (1.0, 0.8)
Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL−5
Recommended oil viscosity:
Above −18_C (0_F)
SAE 90
Below −18_C (0_F)
SAE 80W or 80W−90
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
(four−wheel drive models)
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
0.9 (1.0, 0.8)
Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL−5
Recommended oil viscosity:
Above −18_C (0_F)
SAE 90
Below −18_C (0_F)
SAE 80W or 80W−90
BRAKES
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
83 (3.3)
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
2—3 (0.08—0.12)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Parking brake adjustment when depressed
with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf):
5—7 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
STEERING
Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONrII
or III
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
408
Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Wheel size
Front Rear Spare
P225/70R16 101S 210 (2.1, 30) 210 (2.1, 30) 210 (2.1, 30) 16 6 1/2 JJ
225/65R17 101S 210 (2.1, 30) 210 (2.1, 30) 210 (2.1, 30) 17 6 1/2 JJ
When driving under the above load condition at sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries where
such speeds are permitted by−low, inflate the front and rear tires to the following tire inflation pressure provided that
it does not exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
P225/70R16 101S tires 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 35 psi)
225/65R17 101S tires 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 33 psi)
Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):
103 (10.5, 76)
NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-
sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 385 through 392, in Section 7−2.
Tires
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
409
Engine compartment
Instrument panel
Fuses (type A)
1. A/F 25 A: Air fuel ratio sensor
2. CRT 7.5 A: Rear seat entertainment
system, navigation system
3. STARTER 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system
4. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system
5. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system
Engine compartment
(with daytime running light system)
6. RR HTR 15 A: Rear air conditioning
system
7. H−LP RH LWR 15 A: Right−hand head-
light (low beam)
8. H−LP LH LWR 15 A: Left−hand head-
light (low beam)
9. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system
10. POWER OUTLET2 20 A: Power outlets
11. TOWING 20 A: Trailer lights
12. HORN 10 A: Horns
13. SECURITY 15 A: Theft deterrent sys-
tem
Fuses
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
410
14. H−LP RH UPR 10 A: Right−hand head-
light (high beam)
15. ECU·B 7.5 A: Theft deterrent system,
air conditioning system, gauges and
meters, multiplex communication sys-
tem, electronic moon roof, front pas-
senger occupant classification system
16. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system, fuel pump
17. DOOR LOCK 25 A: Power door lock
system, theft deterrent system
18. H−LP LH UPR 10 A: Left−hand head-
light (high beam)
19. RAD NO.1 25 A: Audio system
20. DOME 10 A: Personal lights, interior
lights, vanity lights, ignition switch light,
wireless remote control system, gauges
and meters, navigation system
21. HAZARD 15 A: Emergency flashers,
instrument panel light, trailer lights
22. SPARE 7.5 A: Spare fuse
23. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse
24. SPARE 25 A: Spare fuse
25. IGN 10 A: Gauges and meters, SRS
airbag system, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system, front passenger occupant
classification system
26. RAD NO.2 7.5 A: Audio system, shift
lock system, navigation system, rear
seat entertainment system, air condi-
tioning system, multiplex communica-
tion system
27. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter
28. P RR DOOR 20 A: Power windows
29. PWR OUTLET1 15 A: Power outlets
30. FR FOG 20 A: Front fog lights
31. ECU−IG 10 A: Electric moon roof,
anti−lock brake system, vehicle stability
control system, shift lock system,
charging system, starting system
32. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wipers and
washer
33. D RR DOOR 20 A: Power windows
34. D FR DOOR 25 A: Power windows,
door courtesy lights, power door lock
system
35. S/ROOF 20 A: Electric moon roof
36. HEATER 10 A: Air conditioning system,
electric cooling fan, rear window defog-
ger, outside rear view mirror defogger,
gauges and meters
37. IG1 7.5 A: Back−up lights, vehicle sta-
bility control system, multiport fuel in-
jection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, outside rear view mir-
ror heaters, power door lock system,
wireless remote control system, naviga-
tion system, multiplex communication
system
38. RR WIP 15 A: Rear window wiper
39. STOP 20 A: Stop lights, high mounted
stoplight, anti−lock brake system, ve-
hicle stability control system, shift lock
system, trailer lights, multiplex commu-
nication system, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system
40. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-
tem
41. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heaters
42. IG2 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, charging system, starter sys-
tem
43. WASHER 20 A: Low windshield washer
fluid level warning light
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
411
44. FR DEF 20 A: Air conditioning system,
outside rear view mirror defoggers
45. P FR DOOR 20 A: Power windows,
door courtesy lights, multiplex commu-
nication system
46. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plate
lights, instrument panel lights, front fog
lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, parking lights
47. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights,
trailer lights
48. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running light sys-
tem
Fuses (type B)
49. AM2 30 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system
50. ABS2 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system
51. ABS1 30 A: Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system
52. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system
53. RDI 30 A: Electric cooling fans
54. RR DEF 30 A: Rear window defoggers
55. CDS 30 A: Electric cooling fans
56. MAIN 40 A: “H−LP RH LWR”, “H−LP
LH LWR”, “H−LP RH UPR” and “H−LP
LH UPR” fuses
57. AM1 40 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system
58. POWER 30 A: Power seat
Fuse (type C)
59. ALT 140 A: “POWER”, “STOP”, “FR
DEF”, “FR FOG”, “OBD”, “TAIL”,
“PANEL”, “S/ROOF”, “D FR DOOR”, “P
FR DOOR”, “D RR DOOR”, “P RR
DOOR” and “PWR OUTLET1” fuses
60. RDI 50 A: No circuit
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
412
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
414
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may ei-
ther call the Auto Safety Hotline
toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or
366−0123 in Washington, D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.
Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hot-
line.
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
ii
Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-
age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in
order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.
Safety symbol
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
iii
Important information about your Toyota
Occupant restraint systems
Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to
read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In
terms of helping you understand how you can receive the
maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this
vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual is
the most important Section for you and your family to
read.
Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-
ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-
tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you
should be aware of. These systems work together along
with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide
occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of
each system can be enhanced when it is used properly
and together with other systems. No single occupant re-
straint system can, by itself, provide you or your family
with the equal level of restraint which these systems can
provide when used together. That is why it is important for
you and your family to understand the purpose and proper
use of each of these systems and how they relate to each
other.
The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help
reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the
event of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-
ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the
event of collision. However, the more you know about
these systems and how to use them properly, the greater
your chances become of surviving an accident without
death or serious injury.
Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of
the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear
seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be
secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for
their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,
and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes
for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing
the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of
the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
iv
In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-
bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources
of serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag,
or if an object or some part of his or her body has been
placed between the occupant and the airbag at the time of
deployment. This is just one example of how the instruc-
tions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help en-
sure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and
increase the safety they can provide to you and your fami-
ly in the event of an accident.
Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section
1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time
of ownership of this vehicle.
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-
tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in
driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-
sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a
system to record data in a crash or a near car crash
event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record
some or all of the following information:
D Engine speed
D Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
D Vehicle speed
D To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
D Position of the transmission selector lever
D Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat
belts or not
D Driver’s seat position
D Front passenger’s occupant classification
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
v
D SRS airbag deployment data
D SRS airbag system diagnostic data
If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control
(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may con-
tain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situations
which include activating the VSC under which the VSC
EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may
record some or all of the following information:
D Behavior of the vehicle
D Steering wheel angle
D Vehicle speed
D To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
D To what extent the brake pedal was applied
D To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of
the 4 wheels
D Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the
purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike
general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound
data such as conversation between passengers.
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a
third party except when:
D An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-
ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
D Officially requested by the police or other authorities
D Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
D Ordered by the court
However, if necessary Toyota will:
D Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety
performance
D Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-
poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,
and only when it is deemed necessary
D Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-
cation information to a non−Toyota organization for
research purposes
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
vi
New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited
warranties:
D New vehicle warranty
D Emission control systems warranty
D Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.
Your responsibility for
maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the
specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives
details of these maintenance requirements. Also included
in Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Important health and safety
information about your Toyota
CAUTION
D WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-
nents contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as
well as waste produced by component wear con-
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
D Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
vii
Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.
You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-
ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or
adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine
Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota
products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-
tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the
modification may not be covered under warranty.
Spark ignition system of your
Toyota
The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-
ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment
Standard.
Installation of a mobile
two−way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in
your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as multi-
port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, electronic throttle control system, cruise control
system, anti−lock brake system, traction control system,
vehicle stability control system, SRS airbag system and
seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your
Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special in-
structions regarding installation.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
viii
Tires and loading on your
Toyota
Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the
excess load may result in the deterioration of
steering ability and braking ability, leading to an
accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-
cally and be sure to keep the load limits given in
this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation
pressure and load limits, see pages 385 and 312.
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is
scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they
are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to
have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-
sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified service
shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your
vehicle.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
ix
On−pavement and off−road
driving tips
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve-
hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is
designed for off−road use also. In addition, this vehicle
has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than
that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design fea-
ture causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rol-
lover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death
or serious injury. Be sure to read “Off−road vehicle precau-
tions” on page 290 in Section 2 and “Off−road driving pre-
cautions” on page 320 in Section 3.
Leak detection pump
(2.4 L 4−cylinder [2AZ−FE]
engine)
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done approximately five hours after the engine is
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-
neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. It
does not indicate a malfunction.
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
x
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
Publication No. OM48646U
Part No. 01999-48646
Printed in Japan 01−0508−00
(U)
Quick index
D If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 133. . . . . . . .
D If your vehicle will not start 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D If your engine stalls while driving 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D If your vehicle overheats 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D If you have a flat tire 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D If your vehicle needs to be towed 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Tips for driving during break−in period 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D How to start the engine 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D General maintenance 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas station information
Fuel type:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher
3.3 L V6 (3MZ−FE) engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher
For improved vehicle performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with an
Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher.
See page 291 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
72.5 L (19.1 gal., 16.0 Imp.gal.)
Engine oil:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.
See page 381 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 385 through 392.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 408.
U −9
C
’06 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0508)
WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU Ċ PLEASE BUCKLE UP
Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.
Toyota belts are:
D Comfortable
D Easy to use
D Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.
U
